Table of Contents
- Contents
- 1 - TV Tour
- 2 - Setting Up
- 3 - Connect your Android TV
- 4 - Connect Devices
- 4.1 - About Connections
- 4.2 - CAM with Smart Card - CI+
- 4.3 - Receiver - Set-Top Box
- 4.4 - Home Theatre System - HTS
- 4.5 - Phones and Tablets
- 4.6 - Blu-ray Disc Player
- 4.7 - DVD Player
- 4.8 - Bluetooth - Speakers and Gamepads
- 4.9 - Headphones
- 4.10 - Game Console
- 4.11 - Gamepad
- 4.12 - USB Hard Drive
- 4.13 - USB Keyboard
- 4.14 - USB Flash Drive
- 4.15 - Photo Camera
- 4.16 - Camcorder
- 4.17 - Computer
- 5 - Switching On and Off
- 6 - Remote Control
- 7 - TV Channels
- 8 - TV Guide
- 9 - Recording and Pause TV
- 10 - Top Picks
- 11 - Home Menu
- 12 - TV Menu
- 13 - Netflix
- 14 - Sources
- 15 - Apps
- 16 - Gaming
- 17 - Internet
- 18 - Your Videos, Photos and Music
- 19 - Smartphones and Tablets
- 20 - Ambilight
- 21 - Multi View
- 22 - Settings
- 23 - Channel Installation
- 24 - Software
- 25 - Specifications
- 26 - Help and Support
- 27 - Safety and Care
- 28 - Terms of Use
- 29 - Copyrights
- Index
Philips 65PUS8901/12 User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for 65PUS8901/12 by Philips which is a product in the TVs category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
Register your product and get support at 8901 series
www.philips.com/welcome
User Manual
65PUS8901
Contents
1 TV Tour 4
1.1 UltraHD TV 4
1.2 Ambilight Projection 4
1.3 Philips Android TV 4
1.4 Watching Channels 4
1.5 Using Apps 5
1.6 Playing Games 5
1.7 Rent a Movie 5
1.8 Pause TV and Recording 5
1.9 Smartphones and Tablets 5
1.10 Bluetooth Connection 5
2 Setting Up 6
2.1 Read Safety 6
2.2 TV Stand 6
2.3 Tips on Placement 6
2.4 Power Cable 6
2.5 Antenna Cable 6
2.6 Satellite Dish 6
3 Connect your Android TV 8
3.1 Network and Internet 8
3.2 Google Account 10
3.3 Philips App Gallery 11
4 Connect Devices 12
4.1 About Connections 12
4.2 CAM with Smart Card - CI+ 14
4.3 Receiver - Set-Top Box 16
4.4 Home Theatre System - HTS 16
4.5 Phones and Tablets 18
4.6 Blu-ray Disc Player 18
4.7 DVD Player 18
4.8 Bluetooth - Speakers and Gamepads 18
4.9 Headphones 19
4.10 Game Console 20
4.11 Gamepad 20
4.12 USB Hard Drive 21
4.13 USB Keyboard 21
4.14 USB Flash Drive 22
4.15 Photo Camera 22
4.16 Camcorder 23
4.17 Computer 23
5 Switching On and Off 24
5.1 On, Standby or Off 24
5.2 Philips Logo Brightness 24
5.3 Keys on TV 24
5.4 Sleep Timer 24
5.5 Switch Off Timer 25
6 Remote Control 26
6.1 Key Overview 26
6.2 Touch Pad 27
6.3 Voice 27
6.4 Keyboard 28
6.5 Pairing the Remote Control 29
6.6 IR Sensor 29
6.7 Batteries 30
6.8 Cleaning 30
7 TV Channels 31
7.1 Channel Lists 31
7.2 Watching channels 32
7.3 Favourite Channels 34
7.4 Text (Teletext) 35
7.5 Interactive TV 36
8 TV Guide 38
8.1 What You Need 38
8.2 TV Guide Data 38
8.3 Using the TV Guide 38
9 Recording and Pause TV 40
9.1 Recording 40
9.2 Pause TV 41
10 Top Picks 43
10.1 About Top Picks 43
10.2 Now on TV 43
10.3 TV on Demand 43
10.4 Video on Demand 44
11 Home Menu 45
11.1 About the Home Menu 45
11.2 Open the Home Menu 45
11.3 Search and Voice 45
11.4 Restricted Profile 45
12 TV Menu 46
12.1 About TV Menu 46
12.2 Open TV Menu 46
13 Netflix 47
14 Sources 48
14.1 Switch to a TV Input 48
14.2 Options for a TV Input 48
14.3 Device Name and Type 48
14.4 Game or Computer 48
14.5 Rescan Connections 49
15 Apps 50
15.1 About Apps 50
15.2 Google Play 50
15.3 App Gallery 51
15.4 Start or Stop an App 51
15.5 Lock Apps 51
15.6 Manage Apps 53
15.7 Storage 53
16 Gaming 54
16.1 What You Need 54
16.2 Gamepads 54
16.3 Play a Game 54
16.4 Ideal Game Settings 54
17 Internet 55
17.1 Start Internet 55
17.2 Options on Internet 55
18 Your Videos, Photos and Music 56
18.1 From a USB Connection 56
18.2 From a Computer or NAS 56
18.3 From a Cloud Storage Service 56
18.4 Play your Videos 56
18.5 View your Photos 57
18.6 Play your Music 57
19 Smartphones and Tablets 59
19.1 Philips TV Remote App 59
19.2 Google Cast 59
19.3 AirPlay 59
2
19.4 MHL 59
20 Ambilight 60
20.1 Ambilight Style 60
20.2 Halo Size 60
20.3 Ambilight Off 60
20.4 Ambilight Settings 60
21 Multi View 62
21.1 Open Multi View 62
21.2 Text (Teletext) and TV 62
22 Settings 63
22.1 Frequent Settings 63
22.2 Picture 63
22.3 Sound 67
22.4 Ambilight 70
22.5 Eco Settings 73
22.6 General Settings 74
22.7 Language, Region and Clock 75
22.8 Universal Access 76
22.9 Child Lock 78
22.10 Wireless and Networks 78
22.11 Android Settings 79
23 Channel Installation 80
23.1 Antenna/Cable Installation 80
23.2 Satellite Installation 83
24 Software 88
24.1 Update Software 88
24.2 Software Version 88
24.3 Open Source Software 88
24.4 Open Source License 89
24.5 Announcements 111
25 Specifications 112
25.1 Environmental 112
25.2 Power 112
25.3 Product Fiche 112
25.4 Operating System 112
25.5 Reception 112
25.6 Display 113
25.7 Dimensions and Weights 113
25.8 Connectivity 113
25.9 Sound 113
25.10 Multimedia 113
26 Help and Support 115
26.1 Register your TV 115
26.2 Using Help 115
26.3 Troubleshooting 115
26.4 Online Help 117
26.5 Support and Repair 117
27 Safety and Care 119
27.1 Safety 119
27.2 Cleaning 120
28 Terms of Use 121
28.1 Terms of Use - TV 121
28.2 Terms of Use - Philips App Gallery 121
29 Copyrights 122
29.1 HDMI 122
29.2 MHL 122
29.3 Dolby 122
29.4 DTS Premium Sound 122
29.5 Wi-Fi Alliance 122
29.6 Microsoft 122
29.7 Other Trademarks 123
Index 124
3
1
TV Tour
1.1
UltraHD TV
This TV has an Ultra HD display. Its resolution is four
times as much as normal HD displays. Ultra HD has 8
million pixels ready for the most refined and lifelike
picture on TV.
On top, the new Ultra Pixel HD Engine continuously
converts any incoming TV signal into Ultra HD
resolution. So you can enjoy this stunning picture
quality the moment you switch on the TV. Or you can
watch native Ultra HD videos through an HDMI
connection. Ultra HD offers TV viewing that is crisp
and sharp even on a big screen.
1.2
Ambilight Projection
Your AmbiLux TV introduces the most recent
Ambilight innovation.
Our new Ambilight Projection now offers a
sensational TV watching experperience. The picture
on your TV screen is simultaniously projected onto
your living room wall as well. Expanding the TV
screen atmospherically, slightly showing picture
details or enhancing its dynamics. This luxuriously
intense yet pleasant effect is out of the ordinary. A
truly immersive TV experience you have never seen
before. Select one of the Ambilight Halo styles to
follow your mood. You can also neutralise the
influence of a coloured wall on the colours of
Ambilight Projection with Wall Colour.
With Ambilight+hue you even expand Ambilight
further. Bringing in the wireless controlled bulbs
of Philips Hue *. All of them will fill your room with
colours that fit what's on TV.
You will miss Ambilight when you switch it off.
* Philips Hue is sold separately.
1.3
Philips Android TV
This a Philips Android TV™ with UHD.
Android TV offers thousands of movies, shows and
games from Google Play, YouTube and your favourite
apps.*
Voice search and personalised recommendations
mean more time being entertained and less time
hunting for something good. With Google Cast built in,
you can easily cast movies, shows and photos from
your Chromebook or Android device to your TV.**
With the Philips TV Remote App on your
smartphone or tablet, you have your TV channels at
your fingertips. Send a photo to the large TV screen or
follow your favourite cooking show on your tablet in
the kitchen. From now on your TV is part of your
mobile household.
Connect the TV to your home network and the
Internet.
* The TV must be connected to the
Internet. Subscriptions might be required for certain
content providers.
** Casting optimized for selected services only.
Streaming quality for other content might vary.
Supported operating systems and devices: Android
2.3 and higher, iOS® 7 and higher, Windows® 7 and
higher, Mac OS® 10.7 and higher and Chrome OS
(version 38 or higher).
Google, Android, Google Play and other marks are
trademarks of Google Inc. The Android robot is
reproduced or modified from work created and
shared by Google and used according to terms
described in the Creative Commons 3.0 Attribution
License.
http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/legalco
de
1.4
Watching Channels
Of course, your TV is made for watching TV channels.
On this TV you can create several favourite lists, you
can reorder a favourite list or rename a channel.
Check out the programme recommendations in Now
on TV or catch up on a TV series with TV on Demand.
With Top Picks, you can open your personalised TV
suggestions. The online TV Guide lets you set
reminders or allows you to make recordings*.
4
* You need a connected USB Hard Drive.
1.5
Using Apps
Apps are a great extention of what you can do with
your TV.
You can install apps from Philips, free apps ready for
TV, or use the apps available for Android or Android
TV. Check out the wide variaty of apps in the Philips
App Gallery or the Google Play Store. To get you
started, some practical Apps are pre-installed on
your TV.
For more information, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Apps.
1.6
Playing Games
This TV is your big screen for gaming.
You can play a game from a connected Game
Console, a game from an installed App or simply an
online game on a website. You can set the TV to the
ideal settings for gaming, to allow quick and
responsive action.
For more information, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Gaming.
1.7
Rent a Movie
To get a rental video, you don't need to leave the
house.
With Video on Demand in Top Picks, you can select
and play your recent favourite movie immediately.
The video store will stream the movie to your TV at
home. Video on Demand is available in selected
countries.
For more information, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Video on Demand.
1.8
Pause TV and Recording
If you connect a USB Hard Drive, you can pause and
record a broadcast from a digital TV channel.
Pause your TV and answer that urgent phone call or
simply take a break during a sports match, while the
TV stores the broadcast on the USB Hard Drive. You
can watch it again later.
With a USB Hard Drive connected, you can also
record digital broadcasts. You can record while you
are watching a programme or schedule a recording of
an upcoming programme.
For more information, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Pause
TV or Recording.
1.9
Smartphones and Tablets
With this Philips Android TV, you can easily share
what's on your smartphone or tablet on the big
screen.
Download and install the Philips TV Remote App. It's
free and available for Android and iOS.
With the TV Remote App on your smartphone or
tablet, you master your media around you. Send
photos, music or videos to your big TV screen or
watch any of your TV channels live on your tablet or
phone. Open the TV Guide and schedule a recording
for tomorrow. Your TV at home will do the job. Switch
on Ambilight+hue and set the coziest colour effects in
your living room. With the TV Remote App you are in
control. You might consider to simply lower the TV
volume.
1.10
Bluetooth Connection
Your TV has Bluetooth technology inside.
You can connect extra wireless speakers or a wireless
headphone. Forget about connecting cables, pairing
your device with the TV is enough.
For more information, press the colour
key Keywords and look
up Bluetooth or Wireless Speakers.
5
2
Setting Up
2.1
Read Safety
Read the safety instructions first before you use the
TV.
To read the instructions, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Safety Instructions.
2.2
TV Stand
You can find the instructions for mounting the TV
stand in the Quick Start Guide that came with the TV.
In case you lost the Quick Start Guide, you can
download it from www.philips.com.
Use the product type number of the TV to look for
the Quick Start Guide to download.
2.3
Tips on Placement
• Position the TV where light does not shine directly
on the screen.
• Dim lighting conditions in the room for best
Ambilight effect.
• Position the front of the TV 24 cm away from the
wall.
• Position the TV parallel with the wall surface.
• The ideal distance to watch TV is 3 times its diagonal
screen size. When seated, your eyes should be level
with the centre of the screen.
9 cm
2.4
Power Cable
• Insert the power cable into the POWER connector
on the back of the TV.
• Make sure the power cable is securely inserted in
the connector.
• Make sure that the power plug, in the wall socket, is
accessible at all times.
• When you unplug the power cable, always pull the
plug, never pull the cable.
Although this TV has a very low standby power
consumption, unplug the power cable to save energy
if you do not use the TV for a long period of time.
Press the colour key Keywords and look
up Switching On and Off for more information.
2.5
Antenna Cable
Insert the antenna plug firmly into the Antenna socket
at the back of the TV.
You can connect your own antenna or an antenna
signal from an antenna distribution system. Use an
IEC Coax 75 Ohm RF antenna connector.
Use this antenna connection for DVB-T and DVB-C
input signals.
2.6
Satellite Dish
Expert Help
Consider asking for expert help when you are setting
up a satellite dish system. An existing but unknown
setup or local conditions of the satellite reception
may complicate the setup of your satellite system.
Improper installation may damage the TV electrically.
Warning
When you have a Universal LNB on your satellite dish,
do not use coaxial cable splitters unless you are using
a Unicable setup.
6
One Tuner
To watch a satellite channel and to record another
channel at the same time, you must connect 2
identical cables from your satellite dish to the TV. If
you only have 1 cable available, the channel you are
recording is the only channel you can watch.
Connect the cable from the satellite dish directly to
the SAT 1 connection. Use a coaxial cable fit for
connecting a satellite antenna dish. Make sure your
satellite dish is perfectly aligned before you start the
installation.
During the satellite installation, select One Tuner.
Two Tuner
To watch a satellite channel and to record another
channel at the same time, you must connect 2
identical cables from your satellite dish to the TV.
Connect the first cable from the satellite dish directly
to the SAT 1 connection and connect the second
cable to SAT 2. Use a coaxial cable fit for connecting a
satellite antenna dish. Make sure your satellite dish is
perfectly aligned before you start the installation.
During the satellite installation, select Two Tuners.
Unicable or MDU
If you use a Unicable system, connect the cable to
the SAT 1 connection. Use a coaxial cable fit for
connecting a satellite antenna dish and only use
Unicable complaint cable splitters. Make sure your
satellite dish is perfectly aligned before you start the
installation.
During the satellite installation, select Two
Tuners and later Unicable.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Unicable, setup for more information.
7
3
Connect your
Android TV
3.1
Network and Internet
Home Network
To enjoy the full capabilities of your Philips Android
TV, your TV must be connected to the Internet.
Connect the TV to a home network with a high-speed
Internet connection. You can connect your TV
wirelessly or wired to your network router.
Connect to Network
Wireless Connection
What You Need
To connect the TV to the Internet wirelessly, you need
a Wi-Fi router with a connection to the Internet.
Use a high-speed (broadband) connection to the
Internet.
Make the Connection
Wireless
To make a wireless connection…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right).
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Connect to
Network and press OK.
4 - Select Wireless and press OK.
5 - In the list of found networks, select on your
wireless network. If your network is not in the list
because the network name is hidden (you switched
off the SSID broadcast of the router), select Add New
Network at the bottom of the list, to enter the
network name yourself.
6 - Depending on the type of router, enter your
encryption key - WEP, WPA or WPA2. If you entered
the encryption key for this network before, you can
select OK to make the connection immediately.
7 - A message will be shown when the connection is
successful.
Wi-Fi On/Off
Make sure Wi-Fi is switched on before you try to
make the connection…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right).
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi On/Off and
press OK.
4 - If it is switched off, select On and press OK.
WPS
If your router has WPS, you can directly connect to
the router without scanning for networks. If you have
devices in your wireless network that use the WEP
security encryption system, you cannot use WPS.
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right).
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Connect to
Network and press OK.
4 - Select WPS and press OK.
5 - Go to the router, press the WPS button and return
to the TV within 2 minutes.
6 - Select Connect to make the connection.
7 - A message will be shown when the connection is
successful.
WPS with PIN Code
If your router has WPS with a PIN code, you can
directly connect to the router without scanning for
networks. If you have devices in your wireless
network that use the WEP security encryption system,
you cannot use WPS.
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right).
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Connect to
Network and press OK.
4 - Select WPS with PIN code and press OK.
5 - Write down the 8-digit PIN code shown on
screen and enter it in the router software on your PC.
Consult the router manual on where to enter the PIN
code in the router software.
8
6 - Select Connect to make the connection.
7 - A message will be shown when the connection is
successful.
Problems
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Troubleshooting for more information.
Wired Connection
What You Need
To connect the TV to the Internet, you need a
network router with a connection to the
Internet. Use a high-speed (broadband) connection
to the Internet.
Make the Connection
To make a wired connection…
1 - Connect the router to the TV with a network cable
(Ethernet cable**).
2 - Make sure that the router is switched on.
3 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
4 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right).
5 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Connect to
Network and press OK.
6 - Select Wired and press OK. The TV constantly
searches for the network connection.
7 - A message will be shown when the connection is
successful.
If the connection fails, you can check the DHCP
setting of the router. DHCP should be switched on.
**To fulfill EMC regulations, use a shielded FTP Cat.
5E Ethernet cable.
Network Settings
View Network Settings
You can view all current network settings here. The IP
and MAC address, signal strength, speed, encryption
method, etc.
To view the current network settings…
1 - Connect the router to the TV with a network cable
(Ethernet cable**).
2 - Make sure that the router is switched on.
3 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
4 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right).
5 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > View Network Settings
and press OK.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Network Configuration
If you are an advanced user and want to install your
network with Static IP addressing, set the TV to Static
IP.
To set the TV to Static IP…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right).
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Static IP Configuration
and press OK.
4 - Configure the connection.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Switch On with Wi-Fi (WoWLAN)
You can switch this TV on from your smartphone or
tablet if the TV is in Standby. The setting Switch On
with Wi-Fi (WoWLAN) must be switched on.
To switch on WoWLAN…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right).
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Switch on with Wi-Fi
(WoWLAN) and press OK.
4 - Select On and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
9
Digital Media Renderer (DMR)
If your media files do not play on your TV, make sure
that the Digitial Media Renderer is switched on. As a
factory setting, DMR is switched on.
To switch on DMR…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right).
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Digital Media
Renderer and press OK.
4 - Select On and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Wi-Fi Smart Screen
To watch digital TV channels on your smartphone or
tablet with the Philips TV Remote App, you must
switch on Wi-Fi Smart Screen. Some scrambled
channels might not be available on your mobile
device.
Legislation or technical regulations in some countries
might prohibit Wi-Fi Smart Screen.
To switch on Wi-Fi Smart Screen…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right).
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi Smart
Screen and press OK.
4 - Select On and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
TV Network Name
If you have more than one TV in your home network,
you can give the TV a unique name.
To change the TV name…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right).
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > TV Network Name and
press OK.
4 - Enter the name with the Remote Control
Keyboard.
5 - To finish, select and press OK.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Clear Internet Memory
With Clear Internet Memory you clear your Philips
server registration and parental rating settings, your
video store app logins, all Philips App Gallery
favourites, Internet bookmarks and history. Interactive
MHEG applications can also save so-called 'cookies',
on your TV. These files will also be cleared.
To clear the Internet memory…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right).
3 - Select Wired or Wi-Fi > Clear Internet
Memory and press OK.
4 - Select OK to confirm.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
File Sharing
The TV can connect to other devices in your wireless
network, like your computer or smartphone. You can
use a computer with Microsoft Windows or Apple OS
X.
On this TV, you can open photos, music and videos
stored on your computer. Use any recent DLNA
certified media server software.
Install the media server software on your computer
and set it up to share your media files with the TV.
Read the manual of the media server software for
more information. This software must be running on
your computer to view or play your files on TV.
3.2
Google Account
Sign In
To enjoy the full capabilities of your Philips Android
TV, you can sign in to Google with your Google
Account.
By signing in you'll be able to play your favourite
games across phone, tablet and TV. You'll also get
customized video and music recommendations on
your TV home screen as well as access to YouTube,
Google Play and other apps.
Sign In
Use your existing Google Account to sign in to Google
on your TV. A Google Account consists of an email
address and a password. If you don't have an Google
Account yet, use your computer or tablet to create
one (accounts.google.com). To play games with
10
Google Play, you need a Google+ profile. If you did
not sign in during the first TV installation, you can
always sign in later.
To sign in after you did the TV installation…
1 - Press HOME, scroll down and select
General Settings and press OK.
2 - Press (right), select Android Settings and press
OK.
3 - Press (down) and select Personal > Add
account and press OK.
4 - Press OK on SIGN IN.
5 - With the remote control keyboard, enter your
email address and press the small OK key at the right
of the keyboard.
6 - Enter your password and press the same small
OK key to sign in.
7 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
If you want to sign in with another Google Account,
first sign out and sign in with the other account.
Sign Out
To sign out of your Google Account…
1 - Press HOME, scroll down and select
General Settings and press OK.
2 - Press (right), select Android Settings and press
OK.
3 - Press (down) and select Personal > Google
and press OK.
4 - Select Remove account and press OK.
5 - Select OK and press OK.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Android Settings
You can set or view several Android specific settings
or information. You can find the list of apps installed
on your TV and the storage space they need. You can
set the language you like to use with Voice. You can
configure the onscreen keyboard or allow apps to use
your location. Explore the different Android settings.
You can go
to www.support.google.com/androidtv for more
information on these settings.
To open these settings…
1 - Press HOME, scroll down and select
General Settings and press OK.
2 - Press (right), select Android Settings and press
OK.
3 - Explore the different Android settings.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
3.3
Philips App Gallery
Philips Apps
Connect the TV to the Internet to enjoy apps selected
by Philips. The Philips App Gallery apps are made
specially for TV. Downloading and installing App
Gallery apps is free of charge.
The Philips App Gallery collection of apps can differ
per country or region.
Terms of Use
To install and use the Philips App Gallery apps, you
must agree to the Terms of Use. If you did not agree
to these terms during the first TV installation, you can
always agree to them later. The moment you agree to
the Terms of Use, some apps will be available
immediately and you can browse the Philips App
Gallery to install other apps.
To agree on the Terms of Use after you did the TV
installation…
1 - Press HOME and select Philips Collection >
App Gallery and press OK to open the App Gallery.
2 - Press OPTIONS and select Terms of Use and
press OK. You can read the Terms of Use or the
Privacy Policy.
3 - Select Agree and press OK. You cannot undo this
approval.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Privacy Settings
You can set some privacy settings for the Philips App
Gallery apps.
• You can allow technical statistics to be send to
Philips.
• You can allow personal recommendations.
• You can allow cookies.
• You can switch on the Child Lock for 18+ rated apps.
To set the Philips App Gallery privacy settings…
1 - Press HOME and select Philips Collection >
App Gallery and press OK to open the App Gallery.
2 - Press OPTIONS and select Privacy Settings
and press OK.
3 - Select each setting and press OK to allow or
disallow. You can read about each setting in detail.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
11
4
Connect Devices
4.1
About Connections
Connectivity Guide
Always connect a device to the TV with the highest
quality connection available. Also, use good quality
cables to ensure a good transfer of picture and
sound.
When you connect a device, the TV recognizes its
type and gives each device a correct type name. You
can change the type name if you wish. If a correct
type name for a device is set, the TV automatically
switches to the ideal TV settings when you switch to
this device in the Sources menu.
If you need help to connect several devices to the TV,
you can visit the Philips TV connectivity guide. The
guide offers information on how to connect and
which cables to use.
Go to www.connectivityguide.philips.com
Antenna port
If you have a Set-top box (a digital receiver) or
Recorder, connect the antenna cables to run the
antenna signal through the Set-top box and/or
Recorder first before it enters the TV. In this way, the
antenna and the Set-top box can send possible
additional channels to the Recorder to record.
HDMI ports
HDMI Quality
An HDMI connection has the best picture and sound
quality. One HDMI cable combines video and audio
signals. Use an HDMI cable for High Definition (HD) or
Ultra HD (UHD) TV signals.
For best signal quality transfer, use a High speed
HDMI cable and do not use an HDMI cable longer
than 5 m.
If a device connected with HDMI is not working
correctly, check if a different HDMI Ultra HD setting
can solve this problem. In Help, press the colour key
Keywords and look up HDMI Ultra HD.
Copy protection
HDMI cables support HDCP 2.2 (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection). HDCP is a copy protection
signal that prevents copying content from a DVD disc
or Blu-ray Disc. Also referred to as DRM (Digital
Rights Management).
HDMI ARC
All of the HDMI connections on the TV have HDMI
ARC (Audio Return Channel).
If the device, typically a Home Theatre Sysytem
(HTS), also has the HDMI ARC connection, connect it
to any of the HDMI connections on this TV. With the
HDMI ARC connection, you do not need to connect
the extra audio cable that sends the sound of the TV
picture to the HTS. The HDMI ARC connection
combines both signals.
You can use any HDMI connection on this TV to
connect the HTS but ARC is only available for 1
device/connection at a time.
HDMI MHL
With HDMI MHL, you can send what you see on your
Android smartphone or tablet to a TV screen.
The HDMI 4 connection on this TV
incorporates MHL 2 (Mobile High-Definition Link).
This wired connection offers great stability and
bandwidth, low latency, no wireless interference and
good quality sound reproduction. On top of that, the
MHL connection will charge the battery of your
smartphone or tablet. Although connected, your
mobile device will not be charging when the TV is on
standby.
Inform yourself about what passive MHL cable is
suited for your mobile device. In particular, with the
HDMI connector for the TV on one side, the type of
connector you need to connect to your smartphone
or tablet.
12
MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link and the MHL Logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the MHL,
LLC.
HDMI Ultra HD
You can watch videos filmed or made in 'native' Ultra
HD resolution - 3840x2160 pixels - on this
TV. Connect devices that play Ultra HD video to one
of the HDMI connectors.
Problems with devices connected with HDMI
This is an Ultra HD TV. Some older devices -
connected with HDMI - do not recognise an Ultra HD
TV electronically and might not work correctly or
show distorted picture or sound. To avoid the
malfunctioning of such a device, you can set the
signal quality to a level the device can handle. If the
device is not using Ultra HD signals, you can switch
off Ultra HD for this HDMI connection.
To set the signal quality…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press OK.
3 - Select HDMI Ultra HD and press OK.
4 - Select UHD 4:4:4/4:2:2 (highest UHD
quality), UHD 4:2:0 or Off and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
HDMI CEC - EasyLink
EasyLink
With EasyLink you can operate a connected device
with the TV remote control. EasyLink uses HDMI CEC
(Consumer Electronics Control) to communicate with
the connected devices. Devices must support HDMI
CEC and must be connected with an HDMI
connection.
EasyLink setup
The TV comes with EasyLink switched on. Make sure
that all HDMI CEC settings are properly set up on the
connected EasyLink devices. EasyLink might not work
with devices from other brands.
HDMI CEC on other brands
The HDMI CEC functionality has different names on
different brands. Some examples are: Anynet, Aquos
Link, Bravia Theatre Sync, Kuro Link, Simplink and
Viera Link. Not all brands are fully compatible with
EasyLink.
Example HDMI CEC branding names are property of
their respective owners.
Operate Devices
To operate a device connected to HDMI and set up
with EasyLink, select the device - or its activity - in
the list of TV connections. Press SOURCES, select
a device connected to an HDMI connection and press
OK.
Once the device is selected, the TV remote control
can control the device. However the keys HOME
and OPTIONS and some other TV keys, like
AMBILIGHT are not forwarded to the device.
If the key you need is not on the TV remote control,
you can select the key in the Options menu.
Press OPTIONS and select Controls in the menu
bar. On the screen, select the device key you need
and press OK.
Some very specific device keys might not be available
in the Controls menu.
Only devices that support EasyLink Remote Control
function will respond to the TV remote control.
EasyLink On or Off
You can switch EasyLink on or off. The TV comes with
the EasyLink settings switched on.
To switch off EasyLink…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select General Settings > EasyLink and press
OK.
3 - Select EasyLink and press OK.
4 - Select On or Off and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
13
EasyLink Remote Control
If you want devices to communicate but you don't
want to operate them with the TV remote control, you
can switch off EasyLink Remote Control separately.
To switch EasyLink Remote Control on or off…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select General Settings > EasyLink and press
OK.
3 - Select EasyLink Remote Control and press OK.
4 - Select On or Off and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
DVI to HDMI
If you still own a device that only has a DVI
connection, you can connect the device to any of the
HDMI connection with a DVI to HDMI adapter.
Connect the audio L/R cable to the AUDIO IN
connector (mini-jack 3.5mm).
Y Pb Pr - Component
Y Pb Pr - Component Video is a high quality
connection.
The YPbPr connection can be used for High Definition
(HD) TV signals. Next to the Y, Pb and Pr signals add
the Audio Left and Right signals for sound.
Match the YPbPr (green, blue, red) connector colours
with the cable plugs when you connect.
Use an Audio L/R cinch cable if your device also has
sound.
Scart
SCART is a good quality connection.
The SCART connection can be used for CVBS and
RGB video signals but cannot be used for High
Definition (HD) TV signals. The SCART connection
combines video and audio signals. The SCART
connection also supports NTSC playback.
Audio Out - Optical
Audio Out - Optical is a high quality sound
connection.
This optical connection can carry 5.1 audio channels.
If your device, typically a Home Theatre System
(HTS), has no HDMI ARC connection, you can use this
connection with the Audio In - Optical connection on
the HTS. The Audio Out - Optical connection sends
the sound from the TV to the HTS.
You can set the type of the audio out signal to fit the
audio capabilities of your Home Theatre System.
For more information, press Keywords and look
up Audio Out Settings.
If the sound does not match the video on screen, you
can adjust the audio to video synchronisation.
For more information, press Keywords and look
up Audio to Video Sync.
4.2
CAM with Smart Card - CI+
14
CI+
This TV is ready for the CI+ Conditional Access.
With CI+ you can watch premium HD programmes,
like movies and sports, offered by digital TV operators
in your region. These programmes are scrambled by
the TV operator and descrambled with a prepaid CI+
module.
Digital TV operators provide a CI+ module
(Conditional Access Module - CAM) and an
accompanying smart card, when you subscribe to
their premium programmes. These programmes have
a high level of copy protection.
Contact a digital TV operator for more information on
terms & conditions.
One Smart Card
Digital TV operators provide a CI+ module
(Conditional Access Module - CAM) and an
accompanying smart card, when you subscribe to
their premium programmes.
Insert the smart card into the CAM module. See the
instruction you received from the operator.
To insert the CAM in the TV…
1 - Look on the CAM for the correct method of
insertion. Incorrect insertion can damage the CAM
and TV.
2 - While looking at the back of the TV, with the front
of the CAM facing towards you, gently insert the CAM
into the slot COMMON INTERFACE 1.
3 - Push the CAM in as far as it will go. Leave it in the
slot permanently.
When you switch on the TV, it may take a few minutes
before the CAM is activated. If a CAM is inserted and
subscription fees are paid (subscription methods can
differ), you can watch the scrambled channels
supported by the CAM smart card.
The CAM and smart card are exclusively for your TV. If
you remove the CAM, you will no longer be able to
watch the scrambled channels supported by the
CAM.
Two Smart Cards
Some Digital TV operators can provide a second CI+
module (CAM) and smart card. A second CAM and
smart card is needed when you want to watch one
channel while recording another channel from the
same TV operator.
If you can watch the same amount of channels with
each card, both cards have identical viewing rights. If
you can watch less channels with one of the cards,
the cards have non-identical viewing rights.
If your smart cards have identical viewing rights, it
does not matter which card you put in which slot. If
one of the cards has more viewing rights than the
other one, insert the card with the most viewing rights
in the slot COMMON INTERFACE 1. Insert the card
with less rights in COMMON INTERFACE 2.
Insert the smart cards into the CAM modules. See the
instruction you received from the operator.
To insert the CAM in the TV…
1 - Look on the CAM for the correct method of
insertion. Incorrect insertion can damage the CAM
and TV.
2 - While looking at the back of the TV, with the front
of the CAM facing towards you, gently insert the CAM
into the slot.
3 - Push the CAM in as far as it will go. Leave it in the
slot permanently.
When you switch on the TV, it may take a few minutes
before the CAM is activated. If a CAM is inserted and
subscription fees are paid (subscription methods can
differ), you can watch the scrambled channels
supported by the CAM smart card.
The CAM and smart card are exclusively for your TV. If
you remove the CAM, you will no longer be able to
watch the scrambled channels supported by the
CAM.
Passwords and PIN codes
For some CAMs, you must enter a PIN code to watch
its channels. When you set the PIN code for the CAM,
we recommend you to use the same code you are
using to unlock the TV.
To set the PIN code for the CAM…
1 - Press SOURCES.
2 - Select the channel type you are using the CAM
for, Watch TV or Watch Satellite.
3 - Press OPTIONS and select Common
Interface.
4 - Select the Common Interface slot (slot 1 or 2) you
15
use for this CAM and press (right).
5 - Select the operator of the CAM and press OK. The
following screens come from the TV operator. Look
up the PIN code setting.
4.3
Receiver - Set-Top Box
Cable Box
Use 2 antenna cables to connect the antenna to the
Set-top box (a digital receiver) and the TV.
Next to the antenna connections, add an HDMI cable
to connect the Set-top box to the TV.
Alternatively, you can use a SCART cable if the Set-
top box has no HDMI connection.
Switch Off Timer
Switch off this automatic timer, if you only use the
remote control of the Set-top box. Switch this timer
off to prevent the TV from switching off automatically
after a 4 hour period without a key press on the
remote control of the TV.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and
look up Switch Off Timer for more information.
Satellite Tuner
Connect the dish antenna cable to the Satellite
receiver.
Next to the antenna connection, add an HDMI cable
to connect the device to the TV.
Alternatively, you can use a SCART cable if the device
has no HDMI connection.
Switch Off Timer
Switch off this automatic timer, if you only use the
remote control of the Set-top box. Switch this timer
off to prevent the TV from switching off automatically
after a 4 hour period without a key press on the
remote control of the TV.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and
look up Switch Off Timer for more information.
4.4
Home Theatre System - HTS
Connect with HDMI ARC
Use an HDMI cable to connect a Home Theatre
System (HTS) to the TV. You can connect a Philips
Soundbar or an HTS with a built-in disc player.
HDMI ARC
If your Home Theatre System has an HDMI ARC
connection, you can use any HDMI connection on the
TV to connect. With HDMI ARC, you do not need to
connect the extra audio cable. The HDMI ARC
connection combines both signals.
All HDMI connections on the TV can offer the Audio
Return Channel (ARC) signal. But once you have
connected the Home Theatre System, the TV can
only send the ARC signal to this HDMI connection.
Audio to video synchronisation (sync)
If the sound does not match the video on screen, you
can set a delay on most Home Theatre Systems with
a disc player to match the sound with the video.
For more information, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Audio to Video Sync.
16
Connect with HDMI
Use an HDMI cable to connect a Home Theatre
System (HTS) to the TV. You can connect a Philips
Soundbar or an HTS with a built-in disc player.
If the Home Theatre System has no HDMI ARC
connection, add an optical audio cable (Toslink) to
send the sound of the TV picture to the Home Theatre
System.
Audio to video synchronisation (sync)
If the sound does not match the video on screen, you
can set a delay on most Home Theatre Systems with
a disc player to match the sound with the video.
For more information, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Audio to Video Sync.
Audio Out Settings
Audio Out Delay
With a Home Theatre System (HTS) connected to the
TV, the picture on TV and the sound from the HTS
should be synchronised.
Automatic audio to video sync
With recent Philips Home Theatre Systems, the audio
to video sync is done automatically and always
correct.
Audio sync delay
For some Home Theatre Systems you might need to
adjust the audio sync delay to synchronise the audio
to the video. On the HTS, increase the delay value
until there is a match between picture and sound. A
delay value of 180ms may be required. Read the user
manual of the HTS. With a delay value set up on the
HTS, you need to switch off Audio Out Delay on the
TV.
To switch off the Audio Out Delay…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right).
3 - Select Advanced > Audio Out Delay and press
OK.
4 - Select Off and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Audio Out Offset
If you cannot set a delay on the Home Theatre
System, you can set the TV to sync the sound. You
can set an offset that compensates for the time
necessary for the Home Theatre System to process
the sound of the TV picture. You can set the value in
steps of 5ms. Maximum setting is -60ms.
The Audio Out Delay setting should be switched on.
To synchronise the sound on the TV…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right).
3 - Select Advanced > Audio Out Offset and press
(right).
4 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Audio Out Format
If you have a Home Theatre System (HTS)
with multichannel sound processing capabilities like
Dolby Digital, DTS® or similar, set the Audio Out
Format to Multichannel. With Multichannel, the TV
can send the compressed multichannel sound signal
from a TV channel or connected player to the Home
Theatre System. If you have a Home Theatre System
without multichannel sound processing, select Stereo.
To set the Audio Out Format…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right).
3 - Select Advanced > Audio Out Format and
press OK.
4 - Select Multichannel or Stereo and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Audio Out Levelling
Use the Audio Out Levelling setting to level the
volume (loudness) of the TV and the Home Theatre
System when you switch over from one to another.
Volume differences can be caused by differences in
sound processing.
To level the difference in volume…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Sound and press (right).
3 - Select Advanced > Audio Out Levelling and
17
press OK.
4 - If the volume difference is large, select More. If
the volume difference is small, select Less.
5 - Press OK.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Audio Out Levelling affects both the Audio Out -
Optical and HDMI ARC sound signals.
Problems with HTS sound
Sound with loud noise
If you watch a video from a plugged in USB flash drive
or connected computer, the sound from your Home
Theatre System might be distorted. This noise is heard
when the audio or video file has DTS sound but the
Home Theatre System has no DTS sound processing.
You can fix this by setting the Audio Out Format of
the TV to Stereo.
Press for All Settings > Sound > Advanced >
Audio Out Format.
No sound
If you cannot hear the sound from the TV on your
Home Theatre System, check if you connected the
HDMI cable to an HDMI ARC connection on the
Home Theatre System. All HDMI connections on the
TV are HDMI ARC connections.
4.5
Phones and Tablets
To connect a smartphone or tablet to the TV, you can
use a wireless or wired connection.
Wireless
For a wireless connection, on your smartphone or
tablet download the Philips TV Remote App from
your favourite app store. In Help, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Philips TV Remote
App for more information.
Wired
For a wired connection, use the HDMI 4 MHL
connection on the back of the TV. In Help, press the
colour key Keywords and look up HDMI
MHL for more information.
4.6
Blu-ray Disc Player
Use a High speed HDMI cable to connect the Blu-ray
Disc player to the TV.
If the Blu-ray Disc player has EasyLink HDMI CEC,
you can operate the player with the TV remote
control.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up EasyLink HDMI CEC for more information.
4.7
DVD Player
Use an HDMI cable to connect the DVD player to the
TV.
Alternatively, you can use a SCART cable, if the
device has no HDMI connection.
If the DVD player is connected with HDMI and has
EasyLink CEC, you can operate the player with the TV
remote control.
For more information on EasyLink, press the colour
key Keywords and look up EasyLink HDMI CEC.
4.8
Bluetooth - Speakers and
Gamepads
18
What You Need
You can connect a wireless device with Bluetooth® to
this TV – a wireless speaker, a subwoofer, a sound
bar or headphones. You can also connect a wireless
gamepad with Bluetooth LE.
To play the TV sound on a wireless speaker, you must
pair the wireless speaker with the TV. You can pair
some wireless speakers and a maximum of 4
Bluetooth LE (low energy) devices. The TV can only
play the sound on one speaker at a time. If you
connect a subwoofer, the sound is played on the TV
and the subwoofer. If you connect a sound bar the
sound is played on the sound bar only.
Attention - Audio to Video syncronisation
Many Bluetooth speaker systems have a high, so
called, 'latency'. High latency means that the audio
lags behind the video, causing unsynchronised 'lip
sync'. Before you purchase a wireless Bluetooth
speaker system, inform yourself about the newest
models and look for a device with a low latency
rating. Ask your dealer for advice.
For more information on how to pair a wireless
speaker, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Bluetooth, pairing.
Pairing a Device
Position the wireless speaker within a distance of 5
meters from the TV. Read the user manual of the
device for specific information on pairing and on
wireless range. Make sure the Bluetooth setting on TV
is switched on.
Once a wireless gamepad is paired, you can use it.
When a wireless speaker is paired, you can select it to
play the TV sound. When a device is paired, you do
not need to pair it again unless you remove the
device.
To pair a wireless speaker with the TV…
1 - Switch on the wireless speaker and place it within
range of the TV.
2 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
3 - Select Wireless and Networks > Bluetooth >
Search Bluetooth Device and press OK.
4 - Select Start and press OK. Follow the instuctions
on screen. You will pair the device with the TV and the
TV will store the connection. You might need to
unpair a paired device first if the maximum number of
paired devices was reached.
5 - Select the type of device (headphone,
subwoofer, …) and press OK.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
For more information on how to select the wireless
speaker, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Speakers, select speaker.
For more information on the Bluetooth On or Off
setting, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Bluetooth, on or off.
Select a Device
Once a wireless Bluetooth speaker is paired, you can
select it to play the TV sound.
To select a speaker to play the TV sound…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select Speakers and press
OK.
2 - Select the loudspeaker system you want and
press OK.
3 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Remove a Device
You can connect or disconnect a wireless Bluetooth
device. When a Bluetooth device is connected, you
can use the gamepad or hear the TV sound through
the wireless speaker. You can also remove a wireless
Bluetooth device. If you remove a Bluetooth device,
the device will be unpaired.
To remove or disconnect a wireless device…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and press OK.
3 - Select Bluetooth, select Remove Device and
press OK.
4 - In the list, select the wireless device and press
OK.
5 - Select Disconnect or Remove and press OK.
6 - Select OK and press OK to confirm.
7 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
4.9
Headphones
You can connect a set of headphones to the
connection on the back of the TV. The connection is
a mini-jack 3.5mm. You can adjust the volume of the
headphones separately.
Do not use the mini-jack connectors in both bottom
corners on the back side of the TV - these connectors
are meant for the detachable side speakers.
To adjust the volume…
1 - Press SETTINGS.
19
2 - Select Headphones Volume and press (right).
3 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
4.10
Game Console
HDMI
For best quality, connect the game console with a
High speed HDMI cable to the TV.
Y Pb Pr
Connect the game console with a component video
cable (Y Pb Pr) and an audio L/R cable to the
TV.
Scart
If your game console only has Video (CVBS) and
Audio L/R output, use a Video Audio L/R to SCART
adapter (sold separately) to connect to the SCART
connection.
Ideal Setting
Before you start playing a game from a connected
game console, we recommend to set the TV in the
ideal setting Game.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Game or Computer for more information.
4.11
Gamepad
Connect a Gamepad
To play games from the Internet on this TV, you can
connect a selected range of wireless Gamepads. You
can use Gamepads with a USB nano receiver or
gamepads with Bluetooth.
To connect a Gamepad with a USB nano receiver…
1 - Plug in the small nano receiver in one of the USB
connections on the side of the TV. The wireless nano
receiver comes with the Gamepad.
2 - If the Gamepad is switched on, you can use the
Gamepad.
You can connect a second Gamepad in the second
USB connection on the side of the TV.
Bluetooth
20
To connect a wireless gamepad with Bluetooth, press
the colour key Keywords and look up Bluetooth,
Pairing.
Suitable Gamepads
A selected range of wireless Gamepads are suited
and tested for use on this TV. Other Gamepads might
not be fully compatible.
The suited Gamepads are…
• Logitech F710
• Logitech F510
• Xbox 360 Wireless Controller for Windows
• Speedlink Strike FX Wireless Gamepad
• Sony Play Station wired
• Mad Catz C.T.R.L. Mobile Gamepad for Android
• Ipega, PG-9023
• Ipega, PG-9025
• PhoneJoy gamepad
Problems
To solve possible interference with other wireless
devices on TV…
• Use a USB extension cord and move the nano
receiver about 1 meter away from the TV.
• Alternatively, you can use a powered USB hub
connected to the TV and plug in the nano receivers in
the USB hub.
4.12
USB Hard Drive
What You Need
If you connect a USB Hard Drive, you can pause or
record digital TV broadcasts (DVB broadcasts or
similar).
If you connect a USB Hard Drive, you can use it to
extent the TV memory to store more apps.
Minimum Disk Space
To pause a broadcast, you need a USB 2.0
compatible Hard Drive with a minimum of 32GB disk
space.
To pause and record a broadcast, you need a
minimum of 250GB disk space. According to the total
disk space available, fixed partitions are formatted for
Pause TV, Recordings and app storage.
For more information on how to install a USB Hard
Drive, press the colour key Keywords and look
up USB Hard Drive, formatting.
Formatting
Before you can pause or record a broadcast, or store
apps, you must connect and format a USB Hard
Drive. Formatting removes all files from the USB Hard
Drive. If you want to record broadcasts with TV Guide
data from the Internet, you must setup the Internet
connection first before you install the USB Hard Drive.
Warning
The USB Hard Drive is formatted exclusively for this
TV, you cannot use the stored recordings on another
TV or PC. Do not copy or change recording files on
the USB Hard Drive with any PC application. This will
corrupt your recordings. When you format another
USB Hard Drive, the content on the former will be lost.
A USB Hard Drive installed on your TV will need
reformatting for use with a computer.
To format a USB Hard Drive…
1 - Connect the USB Hard Drive to one of the USB
connections on the TV. Do not connect another USB
device to the other USB ports when formatting.
2 - Switch on the USB Hard Drive and the TV.
3 - When the TV is tuned to a digital TV channel,
press (Pause). Trying to pause will start the
formatting. Follow the instructions on screen.
4 - The TV will ask if you want to use the USB Hard
Drive to store apps, agree to the question if you do.
5 - When the USB Hard Drive is formatted, leave it
connected permanently.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Pause TV or Recording for more information.
4.13
USB Keyboard
Connect
Connect a USB keyboard (USB-HID type) to enter text
on your TV.
You can connect a keyboard and a mouse to the TV.
Use one of the USB connections to connect.
21
Configure
Install the keyboard
To install the USB keyboard, switch on the TV and
connect the USB keyboard to one of the USB
connections on the TV. When the TV detects the
keyboard for the first time, you can select your
keyboard lay-out and test your selection. If you
select a Cyrillic or Greek keyboard layout first, you
can select a secondary Latin keyboard layout.
To change the keyboard layout setting when a layout
was selected…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right).
3 - Select USB Keyboard Settings to start the
keyboard setup.
Special Keys
Keys for entering text
• Enter key = OK
• Backspace = delete character before cursor
• Arrow keys = navigate within a text field
• To switch between keyboard layouts, if a secondary
layout is set, press the Ctrl + Spacebar keys
simultaneously.
Keys for apps and Internet pages
• Tab and Shift + Tab = Next and Previous
• Home = scroll to the top of the page
• End = scroll to the bottom of the page
• Page Up = jump one page up
• Page Down = jump one page down
• + = zoom in one step
• - = zoom out one step
• * = fit the web page to the screen width
4.14
USB Flash Drive
You can view photos or play your music and videos
from a connected USB flash drive.
Insert a USB flash drive in one of the USB
connections on the TV while the TV is switched on.
The TV detects the flash drive and opens a list
showing its content.
If the contents list does not appear automatically,
press SOURCES and select USB.
To stop watching the USB flash drive content, press
TV or select another activity.
To disconnect the USB flash drive, you can pull out
the flash drive anytime.
Ultra HD on USB
You can view photos in Ultra HD resolution from a
connected USB device or flash drive. The TV will
downscale the resolution to Ultra HD if the resolution
of the photo is higher.
For more information on watching or playing content
from a USB flash drive, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Videos, Photos and
Music.
4.15
Photo Camera
To view photos stored on your digital photo camera,
you can connect the camera directly to the TV.
Use one of the USB connections on the TV to
connect. Switch on the camera after you made the
connection.
If the contents list does not appear automatically,
press SOURCES and select USB.
Your camera might need to be set to transfer its
content with PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol). Read
the user manual of the digital photo camera.
Ultra HD on USB
22
You can view photos in Ultra HD resolution from a
connected USB device or flash drive. The TV will
downscale the resolution to Ultra HD if the resolution
of the photo is higher. You cannot play a native Ultra
HD video on any of the USB connections.
For more information on viewing photos, press the
colour key Keywords and look up Videos,
Photos and Music.
4.16
Camcorder
HDMI
For best quality, use an HDMI cable to connect the
camcorder to the TV.
Audio Video LR / Scart
You can use an HDMI, YPbPr or SCART connection to
connect your camcorder. If your camcorder only has
Video (CVBS) and Audio L/R output, use a Video
Audio L/R to SCART adapter (sold separately) to
connect to the SCART connection.
4.17
Computer
Connect
You can connect your computer to the TV and use
the TV as a PC monitor.
With HDMI
Use an HDMI cable to connect the computer to the
TV.
With DVI to HDMI
Alternatively, you can use a DVI to HDMI adapter
(sold separately) to connect the PC to HDMI and an
audio L/R cable (mini-jack 3.5mm) to AUDIO IN L/R
on the back of the TV.
Ideal Setting
To use the TV as a computer monitor, we recommend
to set the TV in the ideal setting Computer.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Game or Computer for more information.
23
5
Switching On and
Off
5.1
On, Standby or Off
Before you switch on the TV, make sure you plugged
in the mains power in the POWER connector on the
back of the TV.
To put the TV on standby when the indicator light is
off, press the small joystick key on the back of the TV.
The indicator will light up.
With the TV on standby, press on the remote
control to switch the TV on. Alternatively, press
HOME.
Switch back to standby
To switch the TV to standby, press on the remote
control.
Switch Off
To switch the TV Off, press the joystick key. The
indicator light goes off.
The TV is still connected to the mains power but
consumes very little energy.
To switch off the TV completely, disconnect the
power plug.
When disconnecting the power plug, always pull the
power plug, never the cord. Ensure that you have full
access to the power plug, power cord and outlet
socket at all times.
5.2
Philips Logo Brightness
You can switch off or adjust the brightness of the
Philips logo on the front of the TV.
To adjust or switch off…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and select Philips Logo
Brightness.
3 - select Maximum, Medium, Minimum or
select Off to switch off the lighting of the logo.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
5.3
Keys on TV
If you lost the remote control or its batteries are
empty, you can still do some basic TV operations.
To open the basic menu…
1 - With the TV switched on, press the joystick key on
the back of the TV to bring up the basic menu.
2 - Press left or right to select Volume,
Channel or Sources. Select Demo, to start a
demo movie.
3 - Press up or down to adjust the volume or tune to
the next or previous channel. Press up or down to go
through the list of sources, including the tuner
selection. Press the joystick key to start the demo
movie.
4 - The menu will disappear automatically.
To switch the TV off, select and press the joystick
key.
5.4
Sleep Timer
With the Sleep Timer, you can set the TV to switch to
Standby automatically after a preset time.
To set the Sleep Timer…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select General Settings, select Sleep Timer and
press (right). With the slider bar you can set the
time to up to 180 minutes in increments of 5 minutes.
If set to 0 minutes, the Sleep Timer is switched off.
You can always switch off your TV earlier or reset the
24
time during the countdown.
3 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
5.5
Switch Off Timer
If the TV receives a TV signal but you don't press a
key on the remote control during a 4 hour period, the
TV switches off automatically to save energy. Also, if
the TV does not receive a TV signal nor a remote
control command for 10 minutes, the TV switches off
automatically.
If you use the TV as a monitor or use a digital receiver
to watch TV (a Set-Top Box - STB) and you do not
use the remote control of the TV, you should
deactivate this automatic switch off.
To deactivate the Switch Off Timer …
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Eco Settings, select Switch Off Timer and
press (right). Press up or down to adjust the value.
The value 0 (Off) deactivates the automatic switch
off.
3 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
The icon is shown in front of Switch Off Timer
when it is active.
For more information on environmentally friendly TV
settings, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Eco Settings.
25
6
Remote Control
6.1
Key Overview
Top
1 - Standby / On
To switch the TV on or back to Standby.
2 - AMBILIGHT
To switch Ambilight on or off and to switch Ambilight
on from Standby.
3 - TV GUIDE
To open or close the TV Guide.
4 - SOURCES
To open or close the Sources menu.
5 - TV Menu
To open the TV Menu with typical TV functions.
6 - VOICE microphone
7 -
To open the Netflix App (if available) directly. With the
TV switched on or from standby.
8 - SETTINGS
To open the Frequent Settings menu and All Settings.
9 - TOP PICKS
To open the menu with recommended programmes,
Video on Demand (Rental Videos) or Online TV
(Catch Up TV). If available.
10 - VOICE
To start speaking your voice commands.
11 - EXIT
To switch back to watch TV. To stop an interactive TV
application (like HbbTV).
Middle
1 - INFO
To open or close programme info.
2 - Touch pad / Navigation keys
To navigate up, down, left or right. To swipe through a
list.
3 - BACK
To switch back to the previous channel you selected.
To close a menu without changing a setting.
To go back to the previous App/Internet page.
4 - Colour keys
Direct selection of options. Blue key , opens Help.
5 - Volume
To adjust the volume level.
6 - Mute
To mute the sound or to restore it.
7 - OPTIONS
To open or close the Options menu.
8 - OK key
To confirm a selection or setting. To open the channel
list while watching TV.
9 - HOME
To open or close the Home menu.
10 - Channel
To switch to the next or previous channel in the
channel list. To open the next or previous page in
Text (Teletext). To start the next or previous chapter
on a disc.
11 - Multi View
To open a small screen in the big screen.
Bottom
26
1 - Number keys
To select a channel directly.
2 - SUBTITLE
To switch subtitles on, off or to show automatically.
3 - Playback and Record
• Play , to playback.
• Pause , to pause playback
• Stop , to stop playback
• Rewind , to rewind
• Fast forward , to go fast forward
• Record , to start recording
4 - TEXT
To switch on Text/Teletext.
6.2
Touch Pad
The diamond shaped area of the navigation keys on
the remote control - the keys for up, down, left and
right - is also a small touch pad. You can use this
touch pad to swipe through long lists or to go through
a list step by step.
How to use the touch pad…
1 - Open any kind of TV menu with a list, e.g. the
Home menu or Channel list.
2 - Use your thumb to swipe across the touch pad
and towards the direction the list must scroll. Up or
down, or left to right. If you swipe the touch pad, the
highlight will move 1 step. If you swipe and then hold
your thumb on the touch pad (no need to press), the
highlight will scroll through the list until you lift your
thumb from the touch pad.
Take some time to learn this swipe or swipe and hold
gesture. It's really helpful to go through long lists.
You cannot switch off the touch pad.
6.3
Voice
Using Voice
You can search for videos, music or anything else on
the Internet by simply using your voice. You can
speak into the microphone on the remote control.
Alternatively, you can use the remote control
keyboard to enter text.
To use Voice…
1 - Press VOICE. The blue light on the remote
control lights up and the search field opens. As long
as the icon is red on screen, the microphone is
active.
2 - Speak out clearly what you are looking for. You
can speak for 10 seconds before the microphone
switches off. It might take some time for the results to
appear.
3 - In the list of search results, you can select the
item you want.
4 - Press BACK to close the search results if
necessary.
To use the remote control keyboard to search…
1 - Press VOICE to open the search field.
2 - Press (right) to highlight the text field.
3 - Turn the remote control keyboard facing upwards
and type what you are looking for.
4 - Press BACK to hide the onscreen keyboard.
5 - In the list of search results, you can select the
item you want.
6 - Press BACK to close the search results if
necessary.
See also www.support.google.com/androidtv
Voice Settings
You can set the language you like to use with Voice.
To set the language for Voice…
1 - Press HOME, scroll down and select
General Settings and press OK.
2 - Press (right), select Android Settings and press
OK.
3 - Select Preferences > Speech and press OK.
4 - Select the language you want to use and press
OK.
27
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
6.4
Keyboard
Writing Text
With the keyboard on the back of the remote control,
you can write text in any text field on screen.
To write text…
1 - Select a text field if it is not yet selected.
2 - Turn the remote control keyboard facing upwards
to activate the keyboard keys. Hold the remote
control with two hands and type with both thumbs.
3 - To hide the on screen keyboard, press BACK.
4 - Press OK to confirm the text.
Onscreen Keyboard
If you use the onscreen keyboard to enter text, you
can configure the keyboard layout to a layout you are
used to.
To open these settings…
1 - Press HOME, select General Settings
and press OK.
2 - Press (right), select Android Settings and press
OK.
3 - Select Preferences > Keyboard and press OK.
4 - Select Language and press OK. You can set your
language keyboard layout here.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
Key Overview
Qwerty and Azerty
Overview of a Qwerty/Azerty keyboard.*
1 - Azerty character
Character position if the keyboard layout is set to
Azerty.
2 - Shift
To type uppercase characters.
3 - Ω Special characters
To open the onscreen keyboard to select accented
characters or symbols.
4 - Fn key
To type a number or punctuation character.
5 - Spacebar
6 - Navigation and OK
7 - Share this
To share online what you are watching at the
moment.
* Your remote control has a Qwerty / Azerty or a
Qwerty / Cyrillic keyboard, depending on your region.
Qwerty and Cyrillic
Overview of a Qwerty/Cyrillic keyboard.*
1 - Cyrillic characters
Characters available when the keyboard is switched
to Cyrillic.
2 - Cyrillic keyboard switch
To switch the keyboard to the Cyrillic characters or
back to Qwerty.
3 - Shift
To type uppercase characters.
4 - Ω Special characters
To open the onscreen keyboard to select accented
characters or symbols.
5 - Fn key
To type a number or punctuation character
6 - Spacebar
7 - Share this
To share online what you are watching at the
moment.
8 - Navigation and OK
* Your remote control has a Qwerty/Azerty or a
Qwerty/Cyrillic keyboard, depending on your region.
28
Uppercase and Lowercase
To type an uppercase character, press the (Shift)
key just before you type the character.
To type several uppercase characters consecutively,
press and hold the key while typing.
To type uppercase constantly, press the key for 2
seconds to switch the keyboard in uppercase mode.
To switch out of uppercase mode, press the key
again. If no keys are pressed for 20 seconds, the
uppercase mode switches off automatically. Also, if
you press another modifier key, like Fn or Ω, you
switch out of uppercase mode.
Numbers and Punctuation Characters
To type a number or punctuation character, press the
Fn key just before you type the number or
punctuation character you need. You can switch the
Fn mode on or off as you do for the uppercase mode.
Internet
You can use the Fn key to enter www. or .com.
Accented Letters and Symbols
Accented characters and symbols are not directly
available on the Remote Control Keyboard.
To type such a character, you can open the onscreen
keyboard.
To open the onscreen keyboard, press Ω. In the
onscreen keyboard, you can navigate to the character
you need. Switch the keyboard layout with the colour
keys. Press OK to enter a character. The onscreen
keyboard disappears when you press a character on
the Remote Control Keyboard.
Qwerty, Azerty and Cyrillic Keyboard
The standard layout of the Remote Control Keyboard
is Qwerty.
Azerty keyboard
Depending on your region, the Remote Control
Keyboard can be set to Azerty. The Azerty characters
are shown at the top right of the relevant keys.
To set the keyboard layout to Azerty…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language > Remote Control
Keyboard.
3 - Select Azerty or Qwerty and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Cyrillic keyboard
Depending on your region, the Remote Control
Keyboard can be switched to Cyrillic characters.
The Cyrillic characters are shown at the top right of
the keyboard keys.
To write Cyrillic characters…
1 - Press on the remote control.
2 - Press again to switch back to Qwerty.
6.5
Pairing the Remote Control
This remote control uses radio frequency (RF) to send
its commands to the TV. Contrary to remote controls
using infrared signals, you don't have to point at the
TV with RF. For the remote control to communicate
with the TV, both TV and remote control should be
paired (linked) with each other. Once paired, you
cannot use the remote control to control another TV.
Pairing
When you started the initial TV installation, the TV
invited you to press the OK key, and by doing so,
the pairing was done. If the TV does not react on any
remote control key press, pairing was unsuccessful.
Pair again
If the pairing with the remote control was lost, you
can pair the TV with the remote control again.
To start pairing…
1 - On the back of the TV, standing in front of the TV
at the right, press the joystick power key in for 3
seconds. A message will show that the TV is ready to
pair.
2 - Press the colour keys (red) and (blue)
simultaneously for 1 second. A message appears
when the pairing is successful.
When you switch off the TV, the pairing is stored.
This TV can be paired with one remote control only.
To unpair the remote control from this TV, you must
pair it with another TV.
6.6
IR Sensor
The remote control of the TV uses RF (radio
frequency) to send its commands to the TV. With RF,
you do not need to point the remote control at the
TV.
However, the TV can also receive commands from a
remote control that uses IR (infrared) to send
29
commands. If you use such a remote control, always
make sure you point the remote control at the
infrared sensor on the front of the TV.
6.7
Batteries
The TV will notify you when the battery power of the
remote control is low.
To replace the batteries, open the battery
compartment on the keyboard side of the remote
control.
1 - Use a small coin or other small, blunt object and
press the rectangular shaped release button to open
the battery lid.
2 - Slide the battery in the direction of the metal
spring and pull the opposite end of the battery out.
3 - Replace the old batteries with 2
type AA-LR6-1.5V alkaline batteries. Make sure the
+ and the - ends of the batteries line up correctly.
4 - Reposition the battery door and push it down
until it clicks.
Remove the batteries if you are not using the remote
control for a long time.
Safely dispose of your old batteries according to the
end of use directions.
For more information, press Keywords and look
up End of use.
6.8
Cleaning
Your remote control is treated with a scratch-resistant
coating.
To clean the remote control, use a soft damp cloth.
Never use substances such as alcohol, chemicals or
household cleaners on the remote control.
30
7
TV Channels
7.1
Channel Lists
About Channel Lists
After a channel installation, all channels appear in the
channel list. Channels are shown with their name and
logo if the TV is connected to the Internet and this
information is available.
For each type of tuner - Antenna/Cable (DVB-T/C) or
Satellite (DVB-S) - there is a channel list with all
installed channels. You can filter this list to only show
TV or only Radio channels. Or when you have several
satellites installed, you can filter the channels per
satellite.
For each type of tuner - Antenna/Cable (DVB-T/C) or
Satellite (DVB-S) - you can create 4 different lists of
favourite channels for easy channel zapping. You can
name each of these favourite lists individually. Only in
these favourite lists you can reorder channels.
With a channel list selected, you only tune to the
channels in that list when using
the or keys.
Channel icons
After an Automatic Channel Update of the channel
list, newly found channels are marked with a (star).
If you lock a channel, it will be marked with a
(lock).
The 3 most popular channels being watched by
others at this moment are marked with a 1, 2 or 3.
Radio stations
If digital broadcasting is available, digital radio station
are installed during installation. Switch to a radio
channel just like you switch to a TV channel. A Cable
(DVB-C) channel installation usually places radio
stations from channel number 1001 onwards
Open a Channel List
Next to the list with all channels for each tuner,
Antenna/Cable or Satellite tuner, you can select a
filtered list or you can select one of the favourite lists
you created.
To open the current channel list…
1 - Press TV, to switch to TV.
2 - Press OK to open the current channel list.
3 - Press BACK to close the channel list.
To select one of the channel lists…
1 - With a channel list open on screen, press
OPTIONS.
2 - Select Select Channel List and press OK.
3 - In the list menu, select one of the available
channel lists and press OK.
Alternatively, you can select the list name at the top
of the channel list and press OK to open the list
menu.
Tip
You can easely switch between the two tuners in the
Sources menu.
Press SOURCES and select Watch TV to switch to
the Antenna/Cable tuner. Select Watch Satellite to
switch to the satellite tuner.
The TV will always open the last selected channel list
for the selected tuner.
Filter a Channel List
You can filter a list with all channels. You can set the
channel list to show only TV channels or only Radio
stations. For Antenna/Cable channels you can set the
list to show the Free-to-Air or the Scrambled
channels. When you have several satellites installed,
you can filter the satellite channel list per satelliet.
To set a filter on a list with all channels…
1 - Press TV.
2 - Press OK to open the current channel list.
3 - Press OPTIONS.
4 - Select Select Channel List and press OK.
5 - Select Filter Antenna Channels, Filter Cable
Channels or Filter Satellite Channels according to the
list you want to filter.
6 - In the Options menu, select the filter you want
and press OK to activate. The name of the filter
appears as part of the channel list name on top of the
channel list.
7 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Search for a Channel
You can search for a channel to find it in a long list of
channels.
The TV can search for a channel within one of the 3
main channel lists - the Antenna, Cable or Satellite
channel list.
To search for a channel…
1 - Press TV.
2 - Press OK to open the current channel list.
3 - Press OPTIONS.
4 - Select Select Channel List and press OK.
5 - Select Filter Antenna Channels or Filter Cable
31
Channels or Filter Satellite Channels and press OK.
6 - Select Search Channel and press OK to open a
text field.You can use the remote control keyboard or
the onscreen keyboard to enter text.
7 - Enter a number, a name or part of a name and
select Apply and press OK. The TV will search for
matching channel names in the list you selected.
Search results are listed as a channel list - see the list
name at the top. The search results disappear once
you select another channel list or close the list with
search results.
7.2
Watching channels
Tune to a Channel
To start watching TV channels, press TV. The TV
tunes to the channel you last watched.
Tune to a channel
To tune to another channel, press or .
If you know the channel number, type in the number
with the number keys. Press OK after you entered the
number to tune immediately.
If the information is available from the Internet, the TV
shows the current programme name and details
followed by the next programme name and details.
Previous channel
To tune back to the previous channel, press BACK.
You can also tune to channels from a Channel List.
Lock a Channel
Lock and Unlock a Channel
To prevent children from watching a channel, you can
lock a channel. To watch a locked channel, you must
enter the 4 digit Child Lock PIN code first. You cannot
lock programmes from connected devices.
To lock a channel…
1 - Press TV.
2 - Press OK to open the channel list. If necessary
change the channel list.
3 - Select the channel you want to lock.
4 - Press OPTIONS and select Lock Channel and
press OK.
5 - Enter your 4 digit PIN code if the TV asks for it. A
locked channel is marked with a (lock).
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
To unlock a channel…
1 - Press TV.
2 - Press OK to open the channel list. If necessary
change the channel list.
3 - Select the channel you want to unlock.
4 - Press OPTIONS and select Unlock Channel
and press OK.
5 - Enter your 4 digit PIN code if the TV asks for it.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
If you lock or unlock channels in a channel list, you
only have to enter the PIN code just once until you
close the channel list.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Child Lock for more information.
Parental Rating
To prevent children from watching a programme not
suitable for their age, you can set an age rating.
Digital channels can have their programmes age
rated. When the age rating of a programme is equal to
or higher than the age you have set as age rating for
your child, the programme will be locked. To watch a
locked programme, you must enter the Child Lock
PIN code first.
To set an age rating…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Child Lock > Parental Rating.
3 - Enter the 4-digit Child lock PIN code. If you did
not set a code yet, select Set code in Child Lock.
Enter a 4-digit Child lock PIN code and confirm. Now
you can set an age rating.
4 - Back in Parental Rating, select an age and
press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
To switch off the parental age rating, select None.
However, in some countries you must set an age
rating.
For some broadcasters/operators, the TV only locks
programmes with a higher rating. The parental age
rating is set for all channels.
Channel Options
Open Options
While watching a channel, you can set some options.
Depending on the type of channel you are watching
(analogue or digital) or depending on the TV settings
you made, some options are available.
To open the options menu…
32
1 - While watching a channel, press OPTIONS.
2 - Press again to close.
Subtitles
Switch On
Digital broadcasts can have subtitles for their
programmes.
To show the subtitles…
Press SUBTITLE.
You can switch subtitles On or Off. Alternatively you
can select Automatic.
Automatic
If language information is part of the digital broadcast
and the broadcasted programme is not in your
language (the language set on TV), the TV can show
subtitles automatically in one of your preferred
subtitle languages. One of these subtitle languages
must also be part of the broadcast.
You can select your preferred subtitle languages in
Subtitle Language.
Subtitles from Text
If you tune to an analogue channel, you need to
make the subtitles available for each channel
manually.
1 - Switch to a channel and press TEXT to open Text.
2 - Enter the page number for subtitles, usually 888.
3 - Press TEXT again, to close Text.
If you select On in the Subtitle menu when watching
this analogue channel, subtitles will be shown if
available.
To know if a channel is analogue or digital, switch to
the channel and open Channel
Info in OPTIONS.
Subtitle Language
Preferred Subtitle Languages
A digital broadcast can offer several subtitle
languages for a programme. You can set a preferred
primary and secondary subtitle language. If subtitles
in one of these languages are available, the TV will
show the subtitles you selected.
To set the primary and secondary subtitle language…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and
select Languages > Primary Subtitles or Secondary
Subtitles.
3 - Select the language you need and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Select a Subtitle Language
If none of the preferred subtitle languages are
available, you can select another subtitle language if
available. If no subtitle languages are available, you
cannot select this option.
To select a subtitle language when none of your
preferred languages are available…
1 - Press OPTIONS.
2 - Select Subtitle Language and select one of the
languages as subtitles temporarily.
Audio Language
Preferred Audio Languages
A digital broadcast can offer several audio languages
(spoken languages) for a programme. You can set a
preferred primary and secondary audio language. If
audio in one of these languages is available, the TV
will switch to the audio language.
To set the primary and secondary audio language…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and
select Languages > Primary Audio or Secondary
Audio.
3 - Select the language you need and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
Select an Audio Language
If none of the preferred audio languages are
available, you can select another audio language if
available. If no audio languages are available, you
cannot select this option.
To select an audio language when none of your
preferred languages are available…
1 - Press OPTIONS.
2 - Select Audio Language and select one of the
languages as audio temporarily.
Common Interface
If you installed a CAM in one of the Common
Interface slots, you can view the CAM and operator
information or do some CAM related settings.
33
To view the CAM information…
1 - Press SOURCES.
2 - Select the channel type you are using the CAM
for, Watch TV or Watch Satellite.
3 - Press OPTIONS and select Common
Interface.
4 - Select the appropriate Common Interface slot
(slot 1 or 2) and press (right).
5 - Select the TV operator of the CAM and press OK.
The following screens come from the TV operator.
HbbTV on This Channel
If you want to avoid access to HbbTV pages on a
specific channel, you can block the HbbTV pages for
this channel only.
1 - Tune to the channel of which you want to block
the HbbTV pages.
2 - Press OPTIONS and select HbbTV on This
Channel and press (right).
3 - Select Off and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
To block HbbTV on TV completely…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select General Settings > Advanced >
HbbTV and press OK.
3 - Select Off and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Channel Info
You can view the technical characteristics of a
particular channel, like digital or analogue, sound
type, etc.
To view the technical information on a channel…
1 - Tune to the channel.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Channel Info and
press OK.
3 - To close this screen, press OK.
Mono / Stereo
You can switch the sound of an analoge channel to
Mono or Stereo.
To switch to Mono or Stereo…
1 - Tune to an analoge channel.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Mono/Stereo and
press (right).
3 - Select Mono or Stereo and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
7.3
Favourite Channels
About Favourite Channels
In a favourite channel list, you can collect the
channels you like.
For each type of tuner - Watch TV (Antenna/Cable -
DVB-T/C) or Watch Satellite (Satellite - DVB-S) - you
can create 4 different lists of favourite channels for
easy channel zapping. You can name each Favourites
List individually. Only in a Favourites List you can
reorder channels.
With a Favourites List selected, you only tune to the
channels in that list when using
the or keys.
Create a Favourites List
To create a favourite channels list…
1 - Press TV, to switch to TV.
2 - Press OK to open the current channel list.
3 - Press OPTIONS.
4 - Select Create Favourites List and press OK.
5 - In the list at the left, select a channel you want as
a favourite and press OK. Channels come in the list at
the right in the order you add them. To undo, select
the channel in the list at the left and press OK again.
6 - If necessary, you can go on selecting and adding
channels as favourites.
7 - To finish adding channels, press BACK.
The TV will ask to rename the Favourites List. You can
use the on screen keyboard or use the keyboard on
the back of the remote control.
1 - Press BACK to hide the on screen keyboard.
2 - Use the keyboard on the back of the remote
control to delete the current name and enter a new
name.
3 - When done, turn the remote control, select Close
and press OK.
The TV will switch to the newly created Favourites
List.
You can add a range of channels in one go or start a
Favourites List by duplicating the channel list with all
channels and removing the channels you do not
want.
The channels in the Favourites List are renumbered.
34
Add a Range of Channels
To add a consecutive range of channels to a
Favourites List in one go, you can use Select Range.
To add a range of channels…
1 - Open the Favourites List where you want to add a
range of channels.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Select Range and
press OK.
3 - In the list at the left select the first channel of the
range you want to add and press OK.
4 - Press (down) to select the last channel of the
range you want to add. The channels are marked at
the left.
5 - Press OK to add this range of channels and
confirm.
You can also start creating a Favourites List from
Select Range.
Rename a Favourites List
You can rename a Favourites List.
To rename a Favourites List…
1 - Open the Favourite List you want to rename.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Rename Favourites
List and press OK.
3 - Press BACK to hide the on screen keyboard.
4 - Use the keyboard on the back of the remote
control to delete the current name and enter a new
name.
5 - When done, turn the remote control, select Close
and press OK.
6 - Press BACK to close the channel list.
Remove a Favourites List
You can remove a Favourites List.
To remove a Favourites List…
1 - Open the Favourites List you want to remove.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Remove Favourites
List and press OK.
3 - Confirm to remove the list.
4 - Press BACK to close the channel list.
Reorder Channels
Only in a Favourites List you can change the
sequence of channels (reorder).
To change the sequence of channels…
1 - Open the Favourites List you want to reorder.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Reorder Channels and
press OK.
3 - In the Favourites List, select the channel you
want to reorder and press OK.
4 - With the (up) or (down) keys move the
channel where you want it.
5 - Press OK to confirm the new location.
6 - You can reorder channels with the same method
until you close the Favourites List with the BACK
key.
7.4
Text (Teletext)
Text Pages
To open Text (Teletext) press TEXT, while you are
watching TV channels.
To close Text, press TEXT again.
Select a Text page
To select a page . . .
1 - Enter the page number with the number keys.
2 - Use the arrow keys to navigate.
3 - Press a colour key to select a colour-coded
subject at the bottom of the screen.
Text sub-pages
A Text page number can hold several subpages. The
subpage numbers are shown on a bar next to the
main page number.
To select a subpage, press or .
T.O.P. Text pages
Some broadcasters offer T.O.P. Text.
To open T.O.P. Text pages within Text, press
OPTIONS and select T.O.P. Overview and press OK.
Favourite pages
The TV makes a list of the last 10 Text pages you
opened. You can easily reopen them again in the
Favourite Text pages column.
1 - In Text, select (heart) in the top left corner of
the screen to show the column of favourite pages.
2 - Press (down) or (up) to select a page
number and press OK to open the page.
You can clear the list with the option Clear Favourite
Pages.
Search Text
You can select a word and scan Text for all
occurences of this word.
1 - Open a Text page and press OK.
2 - Select a word or number with the arrow keys.
3 - Press OK again to jump immediately to the next
occurence of this word or number.
4 - Press OK again to jump to the subsequent
occurence.
35
5 - To stop searching, press (up) until nothing is
selected.
Text from a connected device
Some devices that receive TV channels can also offer
Text.
To open Text from a connected device . . .
1 - Press SOURCES, select the device and press
OK.
2 - While watching a channel on the device, press
OPTIONS, select Show Device Keys and select
the key and press OK.
3 - Press BACK to hide the device keys.
4 - To close Text, press BACK again.
Digital Text (UK only)
Some digital broadcasters offer dedicated Digital Text
or interactive TV on their digital TV channels. This
includes normal Text using the number, colour and
arrow keys to select and navigate.
To close Digital Text, press BACK.
Text Options
In Text (Teletext), press OPTIONS to select the
following…
• Freeze page
To stop the automatic rotation of subpages.
• Dual screen / Full screen
To show the TV channel and Text alongside each
other.
• T.O.P. overview
To open T.O.P. Text.
• Enlarge
To enlarge the Text page for comfortable reading.
• Reveal
To unhide hidden information on a page.
• Cycle subpages
To cycle subpages when these are available.
• Hide/Show Favourite Pages
To hide or show the list of favourite pages.
• Clear Favourite Pages
To clear the list of favourite pages.
• Language
To switch the group of characters that Text uses to
display correctly.
• Text 2.5
To activate the Text 2.5 for more colours and better
graphics.
Text and TV
You can watch a TV channel in the small screen of
Multi View when you're watching Text (Teletext).
To watch a TV channel while watching Text
(Teletext)…
1 - Press .
2 - Select Multi View: On on screen. The channel
you were watching appears in the small screen.
3 - To hide the small screen, press again and
select Multi View: Off on screen.
Text Setup
Text language
Some digital TV broadcasters have several Text
languages available.
To set your primary and secondary Text language . . .
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language > Languages and
press OK.
3 - Select Primary Text or Secondary Text. and
press OK.
4 - Select your preferred Text language and press
OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Text 2.5
If available, Text 2.5 offers more colours and better
graphics. Text 2.5 is activated as a standard factory
setting.
To switch off Text 2.5…
1 - Press TEXT.
2 - With Text (Teletext) open on screen, press
OPTIONS.
3 - Select Text 2.5 > Off and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
7.5
Interactive TV
About iTV
With interactive TV, some digital broadcasters
combine their normal TV programme with information
or entertainment pages. On some pages, you can
respond to a programme or vote, do online shopping
or pay for a video-on-demand programme.
HbbTV, MHEG, . . .
Broadcasters use various interactive TV systems :
36
HbbTV (Hybrid Broadcast Broadband TV) or iTV
(Interactive TV - MHEG). Interactive TV is sometimes
referred to as Digital Text or Red button. But each
system is distinct.
Visit the broadcaster's Internet website for more
information.
What You Need
Interactive TV is only available on digital TV channels.
To enjoy the full benefits of Interactive TV, you need
a high-speed (broadband) Internet connection to the
TV.
HbbTV
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up HbbTV, on or off for more information.
Use iTV
Open iTV pages
Most channels that offer HbbTV or iTV invite you to
press the colour key (red) or OK key to open their
interactive programme.
Navigate iTV pages
You can use the arrow and colour keys, the number
keys and the BACK key to navigate the iTV pages.
You can use the (Play), (Pause) and (Stop)
keys to watch videos within iTV pages.
Digital Text (UK only)
To open Digital Text, press TEXT. To close,
press BACK.
Close iTV pages
Most iTV pages inform you which key to use to close.
To force an iTV page to close, switch to the next TV
channel and press BACK.
37
8
TV Guide
8.1
What You Need
With the TV Guide you can view a list of the current
and scheduled TV programmes of your channels.
Depending on where the TV guide information (data)
is coming from, analogue and digital channels or only
digital channels are shown. Not all channels offer TV
Guide information.
The TV can collect TV Guide information for the
channels that are installed on the TV. The TV cannot
collect the TV Guide information for channels viewed
from a digital receiver or decoder.
8.2
TV Guide Data
The TV Guide receives information (data) from
broadcasters or from the Internet. In some regions
and for some channels, TV Guide information might
not be available. The TV can collect TV Guide
information for the channels that are installed on the
TV. The TV cannot collect the TV Guide information
from channels viewed from a digital receiver or
decoder.
The TV comes with the information set to From the
broadcaster.
If TV Guide information comes from the Internet, the
TV Guide can also list analogue channels next to the
digital channels. The TV Guide menu also shows a
small screen with the current channel.
From the Internet
If the TV is connected to the Internet, you can set the
TV to receive the TV Guide information from the
Internet.
To set the TV Guide information…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings > Advanced > TV
Guide and select From the Internet and press OK.
3 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Missing recordings
When some recordings seem to have disappeared
from the list of recordings, the TV Guide info (data)
might have changed. Recordings made with the
setting From the broadcaster become invisible in the
list if you switch the setting to From the Internet or
vice versa. The TV might have switched to From the
Internet automatically.
To make the recordings available in the list of
recordings, switch to the setting that was selected
when the recordings were made.
8.3
Using the TV Guide
Open the TV Guide
To open the TV Guide, press TV GUIDE. The TV
Guide shows the channels of the selected tuner.
Press TV GUIDE again to close.
The first time you open the TV Guide, the TV scans all
TV channels for programme information. This may
take several minutes. TV Guide data is stored on TV.
Tune to a Programme
From the TV Guide, you can tune to a current
programme.
To switch to the programme (channel), select the
programme and press OK.
View programme details
To call up the details of the selected programme…
1 - Press INFO.
2 - Press BACK to close.
Change Day
The TV Guide can show the scheduled programmes
for the upcoming days (maximum up to 8 days).
Press the colour key Day and select the day you
need.
Search by Genre
If the information is available, you can look up
scheduled programmes by genre like movies, sports,
etc.
To search for programmes by genre…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Press OPTIONS.
3 - Select Search by Genre and press OK.
4 - Select the genre you want and press OK. A list
with the found programmes appears.
5 - You can set reminders or schedule a recording on
a selected programme.
6 - Press BACK to close the menu.
For more information on Recording, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Recording.
38
Set a Reminder
You can set a reminder for a programme. A message
will alert you at the start of the programme. You can
tune to this channel immediately.
In the TV Guide a programme with a reminder is
marked with a (clock).
To set a reminder…
1 - Press TV GUIDE and select an upcoming
programme.
2 - Press OPTIONS.
3 - Select Set Reminder and press OK.
4 - Press BACK to close the menu.
To clear a reminder…
1 - Press TV GUIDE and select a programme with
the reminder.
2 - Press OPTIONS.
3 - Select Clear Reminder and press OK.
4 - Press BACK to close the menu.
List of Reminders
You can view a list of the reminders you have set.
List of Reminders
To open the list of reminders…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Press the colour key Recordings .
3 - At the top of the screen,
select Scheduled and press OK.
4 - In the list of scheduled recordings and reminders,
select the tab Reminders and press OK to view the
reminders only.
5 - Press the colour key Remove to remove the
selected reminder. Press the colour
key Record to record the selected programme.
6 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Set a Recording
You can set a recording in the TV Guide*.
In the TV Guide, a programme set to be recorded is
marked with a (red dot).
To record a programme…
1 - Press TV GUIDE and select a future or
ongoing programme.
2 - Press the colour key Record .
3 - Press BACK to close the menu.
To cancel a recording…
1 - Press TV GUIDE and select the programme set
for recording.
2 - Press the colour key Clear Recording .
3 - Press BACK to close the menu.
* See chapter Recording and Pause TV for more
information.
39
9
Recording and
Pause TV
9.1
Recording
What You Need
You can record a digital TV broadcast and watch it
later.
To record a TV programme you need…
• a connected USB Hard Drive formatted on this TV
• digital TV channels installed on this TV
• to receive channel information for the on screen TV
Guide
• a reliable TV clock setting. If you reset the TV clock
manually, recordings may fail.
You cannot record when you are using Pause TV.
Some digital TV operators do not allow the recording
of channels.
For more information on installing a USB Hard Drive,
press the colour key Keywords and look up USB
Hard Drive, installation.
Record a Programme
Record Now
To record the programme you are watching right now,
press (Record) on the remote control. The
recording will start immediately.
To stop the recording, press (Stop).
When TV Guide data is available, the programme you
are watching will be recorded from the moment you
pressed the recording key until the programme
ends. If no TV Guide data is available, the recording
will only last 30 minutes. You can adjust the end time
of the recording in the list of Recordings.
Schedule a Recording
You can schedule a recording of an upcoming
programme for today or a few days from today
(maximum of 8 days away). The TV will use the data
from the TV Guide to start and end the recording.
To record a programme…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - On the TV Guide, select the channel and
programme you wish to record. Press (right) or
(left) to scroll through the programmes of a channel.
Use the colour key Day to select the day you
need.
3 - With the programme highlighted, press the colour
key Record . The programme is scheduled for
recording. A warning will show automatically when
overlapping recordings are scheduled. If you plan to
record a programme in your absence, remember to
leave the TV switched to Standby and the USB Hard
Drive switched on.
4 - The TV adds some time margin at the end of the
programme. You can adjust this margin with Auto End
Margin.
5 - Press BACK to close the menu.
List of Recordings
You can view and manage your recordings in the list
of recordings. Next to the list of recordings, there is a
separate list for scheduled recordings and reminders.
To open the list or recordings…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Press the colour key Recordings .
3 - In the list of recordings, select the tabs New,
Watched or Expired and press OK to filter your view.
4 - With a recording selected in the list, you can
remove the recording with Remove or stop an
ongoing recording with Stop Recording . You can
rename a recording with Rename .
5 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Broadcasters can limit the number of days a recording
can be viewed. When this period expires, the
recording will be marked as expired. A recording in
the list can show the number of days before it expires.
When a scheduled recording was prevented by the
broadcaster or when the broadcast was interrupted, a
recording is marked as Failed.
Recording Conflicts
When two scheduled recordings are overlapping in
time, there is a recording conflict. To solve a recording
conflict, you can adjust the start and end time of one
or both scheduled recordings.
To adjust the start or end time of a scheduled
recording…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Press the colour key Recordings .
3 - At the top of the screen,
select Scheduled and press OK.
4 - In the list of scheduled recordings and reminders,
select the tab Recordings and press OK to view
the scheduled recordings only.
5 - Select the scheduled recording that conflicts with
another scheduled recording and press Adjust
40
Time.
6 - Select the start or end time and change the time
with the (up) or (down) keys.
Select Apply and press OK.
7 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Auto End Margin
You can set the time margin that the TV will add
automatically at the end of each scheduled recording.
To set the automatic end time margin…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Press OPTIONS and select Auto End
Margin and press OK.
3 - Press (up) or (down) and press OK to
set the time margin added to a recording
automatically. You can add up to 45 minutes to a
recording.
4 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Manual Recording
You can schedule a recording that is not linked to a
TV programme. You set the tuner type, channel and
the start and end time yourself.
To schedule a recording manually…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Press the colour key Recordings .
3 - At the top of the screen, select Scheduled and
press OK.
4 - Press OPTIONS, select Schedule and press
OK.
5 - Select the tuner from where you want to record
and press OK.
6 - Select the channel to record from and press OK.
7 - Select the day of the recording and press OK.
8 - Set the start and end time of the recording. Select
a button and use the (up) and (down) keys to
set the hours and minutes.
9 - Select Schedule and press OK to schedule the
manual recording.
The recording will appear in the list of scheduled
recordings and reminders.
Watching TV While Recording
Your TV is equiped with 2 tuners. One tuner to watch
a channel and a second tuner to record another
channel at the same time. However, the channels
available for watching during a recording depend on
your TV setup for receiving channels.
Which channels can you watch during a recording…
If you use 1 CAM to decode scrambled channels, you
can only watch the channels that don't need
decoding and the channel you are recording.
If you use 2 CAMs to decode scrambled channels and
both smart cards have identical viewing rights, you
can watch all channels, including the one you are
recording.
If you use 2 CAMs with non-identical viewing rights,
you can only watch the channels of the CAM with less
viewing rights and the channel you are recording.
If you are using a Unicable system and you have only
1 User Band available, you can only watch the
channels that don't need decoding and the channel
you are recording.
For more information, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Smart Card, CAM.
Watch a Recording
To watch a recording…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Press the colour key Recordings .
3 - In the list of recordings, select the recording you
need and press OK to start watching.
4 - You can use the keys (pause), (play),
(rewind), (fast forward) or (stop).
5 - To switch back to watch TV, press TV.
9.2
Pause TV
What You Need
You can pause a digital TV broadcast and resume
watching it a bit later.
To pause a TV programme you need…
• a connected USB Hard Drive formatted on this TV
• digital TV channels installed on this TV
• to receive channel information for the onscreen TV
Guide
With the USB Hard Drive connected and formatted,
the TV continuously stores the TV broadcast you are
watching. When you switch to another channel, the
broadcast of the former channel is cleared. Also
when you switch the TV to standby the broadcast is
cleared.
You cannot use Pause TV when you are recording.
For more information, press the colour
key Keywords and look up USB Hard Drive,
installation.
41
Pause a Programme
To pause and resume a broadcast…
To pause a broadcast, press (Pause). A progress
bar at the bottom of the screen appears briefly.
To call up the progress bar, press (Pause) again.
To resume watching, press (Play).
With the progress bar on screen, press (Rewind)
or press (Forward) to select from where you want
to start viewing the paused broadcast. Press these
keys repeatedly to change speed.
You can pause a broadcast for a maximum time span
of 90 minutes.
To switch back to the live TV broadcast,
press (Stop).
Replay
Since the TV stores the broadcast you are watching,
you can mostly replay the broadcast for a few
seconds.
To replay a current broadcast…
1 - Press (Pause)
2 - Press (Rewind). You can
press repeatedlyto select from where you want
to start viewing the paused broadcast. Press these
keys repeatedly to change speed. At one point you
will reach the start of the broadcast storage or the
maximum time span.
3 - Press (Play) to watch the broadcast again.
4 - Press (Stop) to watch the broadcast live.
42
10
Top Picks
10.1
About Top Picks
With Top Picks your TV recommends…
• current TV programmes in Now on TV
• online TV services (Catch Up TV) in TV on Demand
• the latest rental videos in Video on Demand
To enjoy Top Picks, connect your TV to the
Internet. Make sure you agree to the Terms of Use.
The Top Picks information and services are only
available in selected countries.
Terms of Use
To allow the TV to make these recommendations, you
must agree to the Terms of Use. To get personalised
recommendations based on your viewing habits,
make sure you checked the box for Personalized
Recommendations Service Opt-In.
To open the Terms of Use…
1 - Press TOP PICKS.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Terms of Use and
press OK.
3 - Select Privacy Settings and press OK.
4 - Select Personalized Recommendations Service
Opt-In and press OK to check the box. Press OK
again to uncheck.
5 - Press BACK to close the menu.
10.2
Now on TV
About Now on TV
With Now on TV , the TV recommends the 10
most popular programmes to watch at this moment.
The TV recommends programmes on TV now or
starting within 15 minutes. The recommended
programmes are selected from the channels you
installed. The selection is made from channels of your
country. Also, you can let Now on TV do some
personalised recommendations for you, based on
programmes you watch regularly.
To make the Now on TV information available…
• the Now on TV information must be available in your
country.
• the TV must have channels installed.
• the TV must be connected to the Internet.
• the TV Clock must be set to Automatic or Country
Dependent.
• you must accept the Terms of Use (You might have
accepted already when you connected to the
Internet.).
The icon will only appear at the top of the screen
when Now on TV is available.
The TV does not store former recommendations.
Using Now on TV
To open Now on TV…
1 - Press TOP PICKS to open the Top Picks
menu.
2 - Select Now on TV at the top of the screen
and press OK.
3 - Press BACK to close.
When you open Now on TV, the TV may need a few
seconds to refresh the page information.
In Now on TV you can…
• select and press OK on a programme icon to tune to
the ongoing programme.
• select and press OK on a scheduled programme
icon to tune to the channel already.
You can use the colour keys on the remote control to
start, stop or clear a scheduled recording. You can
also set or remove a reminder that warns you when a
programme starts.
To leave Now on TV without tuning to another
channel, press BACK.
10.3
TV on Demand
About TV on Demand
With TV on Demand , you can watch TV
programmes you missed or watch your favourite
programmes whenever it suits you best. This service is
also called Catch Up TV, Replay TV or Online TV.
Programmes available on TV on Demand are free to
watch.
You can let TV on Demand do some personalised
recommendations of programmes, based on the TV
installation and the programmes you watch regularly.
The icon will only appear at the top of the screen
when TV on Demand is available.
43
Using TV on Demand
To open TV on Demand…
1 - Press TOP PICKS to open the Top Picks
menu.
2 - Select TV on Demand at the top of the
screen and press OK.
3 - Press (down) to open the page full screen.
4 - You can select a specific broadcaster if more than
one is available.
5 - Select a programme icon and press OK to start
watching.
6 - Press BACK to close.
When you open TV on Demand, the TV may need a
few seconds to refresh the page information.
Once a programme started, you can use the (Play)
and (Pause) keys.
10.4
Video on Demand
About Video on Demand
With Video on Demand , you can rent movies
from an online rental video store.
You can let Video on Demand do some personalised
recommendations of movies, based on your country,
the TV installation and the programmes you watch
regularly.
The icon will only appear at the top of the screen
when Video on Demand is available.
Payment
When you rent or buy a movie, you can pay the video
store securely with your credit card. Most video
stores ask you to create a login account the first time
you rent a movie.
Internet Traffic
Streaming a lot of videos may cause you to exceed
your monthly Internet traffic limit.
Using Video on Demand
To open Video on Demand…
1 - Press TOP PICKS to open the Top Picks
menu.
2 - Select Video on Demand at the top of the
screen and press OK.
3 - Use the navigation keys to select a movie poster.
4 - Press BACK to close.
When you open Video on Demand, the TV may need
a few seconds to refresh the page information.
You can select a specific video store if more than one
is available.
To rent a movie…
1 - Navigate the highlight on a movie poster. Limited
info will show after some seconds.
2 - Press OK to open the movie page of the video
store for a synopsis of the movie.
3 - Confirm your order.
4 - Make the payment on TV.
5 - Start watching. You can use the (Play)
and (Pause) keys.
44
11
Home Menu
11.1
About the Home Menu
To enjoy the benefits of your Android TV, connect the
TV to the Internet.
Like on your Android smartphone or tablet, the Home
menu is the centre of your TV. From the Home menu
you can start any application, switch to a TV channel,
rent a movie, open a website or switch to a
connected device. Depending on your TV setup and
your country the Home menu can contain different
items.
The Home menu is organised in rows…
Recommendations
The first row suggests popular videos, music videos or
Internet hits. You can set the Privacy settings in Terms
of Use to allow suggestions based on your personal
viewing habits.
Philips Collection
This row contains suggestions from the Philips App
Gallery.
Apps
The row of Apps contain all Apps that come with the
TV and the Apps you download from the Google Play
store yourself. In this row you will also find the Apps
for TV, like Watch TV, Sources, Media and others.
Apps you started recently will appear in front of the
row.
Games
From here, you can start a game on TV. If you
download a game, it will appear in this row.
Settings
From here, you can open a selection of settings.
However, to find all settings, press SETTINGS and
select All Settings. You can also open Help here.
See also www.support.google.com/androidtv
11.2
Open the Home Menu
To open the Home menu and open an item…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Select an item and press OK to open it.
3 - Press BACK to close the Home menu without
opening anything.
You can use the remote control Touch Pad to scroll
through rows quickly.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Remote Control, Touch Pad for more information.
11.3
Search and Voice
You can search for videos, music or anything else on
the Internet by simply using your voice. You can
speak into the microphone on the remote control.
Alternatively, you can use the remote control
keyboard to enter text.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and
look up Voice for more information.
11.4
Restricted Profile
You can restrict the use of certain apps by switching
the TV to a restricted profile. This restricted profile will
only allow the use of apps which you have selected.
You can only switch out of this profile with a PIN
code.
With the TV switched to a restricted profile you
cannot…
• Find or open apps which are marked as Not allowed
• Access the Google Play Store
• Purchase through Google Play Movies & TV, nor
Google Play Games
• Use third-party apps that don't use the Google sign-
in
With the TV switched to a restricted profile you can…
• Watch content already rented or purchased from
Google Play Movies & TV
• Play games already purchased and installed from
Google Play Games
• Access the following settings: Wi-Fi network, Speech
and Accessibility
• Add Bluetooth accessories
The Google Account on TV will stay logged in. Using a
restricted profile doesn't change the Google Account.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Restricted Profile for more information.
45
12
TV Menu
12.1
About TV Menu
If the TV cannot be connected with the Internet, you
can use the TV Menu as your Home menu.
In the TV Menu, you will find every TV function.
12.2
Open TV Menu
To open TV Menu and open an item…
1 - Press to open TV Menu.
2 - Select an item and press OK to open or start it.
3 - Press BACK to close TV Menu without
starting anything.
46
13
Netflix
If you have a Netflix menbership subscription, you
can enjoy Netflix on this TV. Your TV must be
connected to the Internet. In your region, Netflix
might only come available with future software
updates.
To open Netflix, press to open the Netflix App.
You can open Netflix immediately from a TV in
standby.
www.netflix.com
47
14
Sources
14.1
Switch to a TV Input
From the list of Sources, you can switch to any of the
TV inputs. You can switch to a tuner to watch TV,
open the content of a connected USB Flash Drive or
see the recordings you made on a connected USB
Hard Drive. You can switch to your connected devices
to watch their programme, a digital receiver or a Blu-
ray Disc player.
To switch to a TV input…
1 - Press SOURCES to open the Sources menu.
2 - Select the TV input you want to watch and press
OK. The TV will show the programme of the device.
3 - Press SOURCES again to close the menu
without switching to a TV input.
One Touch Play
With the TV in standby, you can switch on a disc
player with your TV remote control.
To switch on both disc player and TV from standby
and start playing the disc immediately, press (play)
on the TV remote control. The device must be
connected with an HDMI cable and both TV and
device must have HDMI CEC switched on.
14.2
Options for a TV Input
Some TV input devices offer specific settings.
To set the options for a specific TV input…
1 - Press SOURCES.
2 - Select the TV input in the list and press OK.
3 - Press OPTIONS. You can set the options for
the selected TV input here.
4 - Press OPTIONS again to close the Options
menu.
Possible options…
Controls
With this option you can operate the connected
device with the TV remote control. The device must
be connected with an HDMI cable and both TV and
device must have HDMI CEC switched on.
Device Info
Open this option to view information on the
connected device.
14.3
Device Name and Type
When you connect a new device to the TV and the TV
detects the device, you can assign an icon that fits the
device type. If you connect a device with an HDMI
cable and HDMI CEC, the TV detects the device type
automatically and the device gets an appropriate icon
and name.
The device type determines picture and sound styles,
resolution values, specific settings or the position
within the Sources menu. You don't have to worry
about the ideal settings.
Rename or Change Type
You can always change the name or change the type
of a connected device. Look for the icon at the
right of the device name in the Sources menu. Some
TV input sources do not allow a name change.
To change the device name or type…
1 - Select the device in the Sources menu.
2 - Press (right) to select the icon and press
OK.
3 - Press BACK to hide the onscreen keyboard.
4 - Use the keyboard on the back of the remote
control to delete the current name and enter a new
one.
5 - If you want to change the type of the device,
press (down) to find all available device types.
Select the type you want and press OK.
6 - If you want to reset the name and type of the
device to the original connector name, select Reset
and press OK.
7 - Select Close and press OK to close this menu.
14.4
Game or Computer
The device type determines picture and sound styles,
resolution values and other specifics. You don't have
to worry about the ideal settings.
For some devices the type of the device is not that
clear. A game console can have a built-in Blu-ray
Disc player and the type is set to Player because it is
used as a disc player most of the time. For this kind of
devices, you can temporarily switch to the ideal
settings for gaming. Or alternatively, switch to the
ideal settings for a connected computer.
You can only use the setting Game or Computer
when you switch to a connected device in the
Sources menu. The Game or Computer setting is
stored for the selected device.
To switch to the ideal settings for gaming or computer
manually…
48
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture > Advanced and press OK.
3 - Select Game or Computer and press OK.
4 - Select Game, Computer or Off.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
Remember to set this setting back to Off when you
stop playing the game.
14.5
Rescan Connections
You can rescan all TV connections to update the
Sources menu with recently connected devices.
To rescan the connections…
1 - Select the icon at the top right of the Sources
menu.
2 - Press OK to start scanning the connections.
Newly connected devices will be added to the
Sources menu.
49
15
Apps
15.1
About Apps
You can find all installed apps in
the Apps section of the Home menu.
Like apps on your smartphone or tablet, the apps on
your TV offer specific functions for an enriched TV
experience. Apps like YouTube, Twitter, games, video
stores or weather forecasts (a.o.). You can use the
Internet app to surf the Internet.
Apps can come from the Philips App Gallery or
the Google Play™ Store . To get you started, some
practical apps are pre-installed on your TV.
To install apps from the Philips App Gallery or the
Google Play Store, the TV must be connected to the
Internet. You must agree to the Terms of Use to use
apps from the App Gallery. You must sign in with a
Google Account to use the Google Play apps and
Google Play Store.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up App Gallery, Terms of Use or App Gallery, Privacy
Settings for more information.
15.2
Google Play
Movies & TV
With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent or buy
movies and TV shows to watch on TV.
What You Need
• your TV must be connected with the Internet
• you must sign in with your Google Account on TV
• add a credit card to your Google Account to
purchase movies and TV shows
To rent or buy a movie or TV show…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Movies & TV and press OK.
3 - Select a movie or TV show and press OK.
4 - Select the purchase you want and press OK. You
will be taken through the purchase procedure.
To watch a rented or bought movie or TV show…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Movies & TV and press OK.
3 - Select the movie or TV show from your library in
the app, select the titel and press OK.
4 - You can use the (stop), (pause),
(rewind) or (fast forward) keys on the remote
control.
5 - To stop the Movies & TV app, press BACK
repeatedly or press EXIT.
Some Google Play products and features aren't
available in all countries.
Find more information on
support.google.com/androidtv
Music
With Google Play Music, you can play your favourite
music on TV.
With Google Play Music you can buy new music on
your computer or mobile device. Or, on your TV, you
can sign up for All Access, the Google Play Music
subscription. Alternatively, you can play the music
you already own, stored on your computer.
What You Need
• your TV must be connected with the Internet
• you must sign in with your Google Account on TV
• add a credit card to your Google Account to take a
music subscription
To start Google Play Music…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Music and press OK.
3 - Select the music you want and press OK.
4 - To stop the Music app, press BACK
repeatedly or press EXIT.
Some Google Play products and features aren't
available in all countries.
Find more information on
support.google.com/androidtv
Games
With Google Play Games, you can play games on TV.
Online or offline.
You can see what your friends are playing currently or
you can join the game and compete. You can track
your achievements or start wherever you left off.
What You Need
• your TV must be connected with the Internet
• you must sign in with your Google Account on TV
• add a credit card to your Google Account to
purchase new games
Start the Google Play Games app to select and install
new game apps on your TV. Some games are free of
charge. A message appears if a particular game needs
a gamepad to play the game.
50
To start or stop a Google Play Game…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Games and press OK.
3 - Select a game to play or select a new game to
install and press OK.
4 - When done, press BACK repeatedly or
press EXIT or stop the app with its dedicated
exit/stop button.
The games you install will also appear in the row of
Games in the Home menu
Some Google Play products and features aren't
available in all countries.
Find more information on
support.google.com/androidtv
Google Play Store
From the Google Play Store you can download and
install new apps. Some apps are free of charge.
What You Need
• your TV must be connected with the Internet
• you must sign in with your Google Account on TV
• add a credit card to your Google Account to
purchase apps
To install a new app…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Store and press OK.
3 - Select the app you want to install and press OK.
4 - To close the Google Play Store, press BACK
repeatedly or press EXIT.
Parental controls
In the Google Play Store, you can hide apps
according to users/buyers maturity. You need to enter
a PIN code to select or change the level of maturity.
To set the parental control…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Store and press OK.
3 - Select Settings > Parental controls and press OK.
4 - Select the level of maturity you want.
5 - On request, enter the PIN code.
6 - To close the Google Play Store, press BACK
repeatedly or press EXIT.
Some Google Play products and features aren't
available in all countries.
Find more information
on support.google.com/androidtv
Payments
To make a payment on Google Play on TV, you must
add a form of payment - a credit card (outside the
United States) - to your Google Account. When you
purchase a movie or TV show, you will be charged on
this credit card.
To add a credit card …
1 - On your computer, go to accounts.google.com
and sign in with the Google Account you will use with
Google Play on TV.
2 - Go to wallet.google.com to add a card to your
Google Account.
3 - Enter your credit card data and accept the terms
and conditions.
15.3
App Gallery
Connect the TV to the Internet to enjoy apps selected
by Philips. These apps are made specially for
TV. The Philips App Gallery offers a wide diversity
of apps. For some countries, you can install apps of a
local Videostore or apps from TV broadcasters in your
country. The latter can offer Catch-Up TV services.
Downloading and installing App Gallery apps is free
of charge.
The Philips App Gallery collection of apps can differ
per country or region.
Some App Gallery apps are pre-installed on your TV.
To install other apps from the App Gallery, you will be
asked to agree to the Terms of Use. You can set the
Privacy Settings according to your preference.
To install an app from the App Gallery…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Philips Collection >
App Gallery and press OK.
3 - Select an app icon and press OK.
4 - Select Install and press OK.
15.4
Start or Stop an App
You can start an app from the Home menu.
To start an app…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down to Apps and select the app you
want and press OK.
3 - To stop an app, press BACK or press EXIT
or stop the app with its dedicated exit/stop button.
51
15.5
Lock Apps
About App Locks
You can lock apps unsuited for children. You can lock
18+ rated apps from the App Gallery or set up a
restricted profile in the Home menu.
18+
The 18+ app lock will ask for a PIN code when you try
to start an 18+ rated app. This lock is only valid for 18+
rated apps from the Philips App Gallery.
Restricted profile
You can set up a restructed profile for the Home
menu where only the apps you allow are available.
You need to enter a PIN code to set up and switch on
the restricted profile.
Google Play Store - Maturity
In the Google Play Store, you can hide apps
according to users/buyers maturity. You need to enter
a PIN code to select or change the level of maturity.
The level of maturity will determine which apps are
available for instalation.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Google Play Store for more information.
Lock 18+ rated apps
You can lock 18+ rated apps from the Philips App
Gallery. This setting controls the 18+ setting in the
Philips App Gallery Privacy Settings.
To lock 18+ rated apps…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Child Lock, select App Lock and press OK.
3 - Select On and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Child Lock, Set PIN code for more information.
Restricted Profile
About Restricted Profile
You can restrict the use of certain apps by switching
the TV to a restricted profile. The Home menu will
only show the apps you allowed. You need a PIN
code to switch out of the restricted profile.
With the TV switched to a restricted profile you
cannot…
• Find or open apps which are marked as Not allowed
• Access the Google Play Store
• Purchase through Google Play Movies & TV, nor
Google Play Games
• Use third-party apps that don't use the Google sign-
in
With the TV switched to a restricted profile you can…
• Watch content already rented or purchased from
Google Play Movies & TV
• Play games already purchased and installed from
Google Play Games
• Access the following settings: Wi-Fi network, Speech
and Accessibility
• Add Bluetooth accessories
The Google Account on TV will stay logged in. Using a
restricted profile doesn't change the Google Account.
Set Up
To set up the restricted profile…
1 - Press HOME, scroll down and
select Settings > General
Settings and press OK.
2 - Press (right), select Android Settings and press
OK.
3 - Press (down) and select Personal > Security &
restrictions and press OK.
4 - Select Settings and press OK.
5 - Enter a PIN code with the remote control.
6 - Select Allowed apps and press OK.
7 - In the list of available apps, select an app and
press OK to allow or not allow this app.
8 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Now you can enter the restricted profile.
With the PIN code, you can always change the PIN
code or edit the list of allowed or not allowed apps.
Enter
To enter (switch to) the restricted profile…
1 - Press HOME, scroll down and
select Settings > General
Settings and press OK.
2 - Press (right), select Android Settings and press
OK.
3 - Press (down) and select Personal > Security &
restrictions and press OK.
4 - Select Enter restricted profile and press OK.
5 - Enter a PIN code with the remote control.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
You can see when a restricted profile is entered if an
icon appears in the Home screen. Scroll down to
52
Settings and scroll to the far right.
Exit
To exit the restricted profile…
1 - Press HOME, scroll down and scroll far right.
2 - Select Restricted Profile and press OK.
3 - Select Exit restricted profile and press OK.
4 - Enter the PIN code. The TV will exit the restricted
profile.
15.6
Manage Apps
If you stop an app and return to the Home menu, the
app is not really stopped. The app is still running in
the background to be readily available when you start
it again. To run fluently, most apps need to save some
data in the cache memory of the TV. It might be good
to stop an app completely or clear the cache data of
a particular app to optimise the overall performance
of apps and to keep memory usage low on your
Android TV. Also, it is best to uninstall apps that you
are not using anymore.
To open the list of downloaded and system apps…
1 - Press HOME, scroll down and select
Settings > General Settings and press OK.
2 - Press (left), select Android Settings and press
OK.
3 - Select Device > Apps and press OK.
4 - Select an app and press OK. If the app is still
running, you can force it to stop or you can clear the
cache data. You can uninstall apps you downloaded.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
If you are using a USB Hard Drive to store apps, you
can move the app from the USB Hard Drive to the TV
memory or vice versa.
15.7
Storage
You can see how much storage space - the internal
TV memory - you are using for your apps, videos,
music, etc. You can see how much free space you still
have available for installing new apps. Check your
storage if apps start to run slow or in case of app
trouble.
To see how much storage you are using…
1 - Press HOME, scrolldown and
select Settings > General
Settings and press OK.
2 - Press (left), select Android Settings and press
OK.
3 - Select Device > Storage & reset and press OK.
4 - View the storage usage of the TV memory.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
USB Hard Drive
If you connect a USB Hard Drive, you can use the
drive to extent the TV memory to store more apps.
Allow the USB Hard Drive to be used as an additional
TV memory during the formatting process. The TV will
try to store new apps on the USB Hard Drive first.
Some apps do not allow to be stored on a USB Hard
Drive.
53
16
Gaming
16.1
What You Need
On this TV, you can play games…
• from the App Gallery in the Home menu
• from the Google Play Store in the Home menu
• from a connected Game Console
Games from the App Gallery or the Google Play Store
must be downloaded and installed on TV before you
can play them. Some games need a gamepad to play.
To install game apps from the Philips App Gallery or
the Google Play Store, the TV must be connected to
the Internet. You must agree to the Terms of Use to
use apps from the App Gallery. You must sign in with
a Google Account to use the Google Play apps and
Google Play Store.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up App Gallery, Terms of Use or App Gallery,
Privacy Settings for more information.
For more information on connecting to the Internet,
press the colour key Keywords and look up
Network Installation.
16.2
Gamepads
To play games from the Internet on this TV, you can
connect a selected range of wireless Gamepads. The
TV can support 2 connected Gamepads at a time.
When you connect the Gamepad, you can use it
immediately.
For more information on connecting a gamepad,
press the colour key Keywords and look
up Gamepad, connect.
16.3
Play a Game
From the Home menu
To start a game from the Home menu…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down to Games , select a game and
press OK.
3 - Press BACK repeatedly or press EXIT or
stop the app with its dedicated exit/stop button.
From a Game Console
To start a game from a Game Console…
1 - Switch on the Game Console.
2 - Press SOURCES and select a game console
or the name of the connection.
3 - Start the game.
4 - Press BACK repeatedly or press EXIT or
stop the app with its dedicated exit/stop button.
For more information on connecting a Game Console,
press Keywords and look up Game Console,
connect.
16.4
Ideal Game Settings
If you start playing a game app from the Home menu,
the TV will switch to the ideal game settings
automatically. If you start a game from a connected
game console with the device type set to 'Game
Console', also then the TV switches to the ideal game
settings automatically. You can always switch the TV
to the ideal game settings manually.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Game or Computer for more information.
54
17
Internet
17.1
Start Internet
You can browse the Internet on your TV. You can
view any Internet website but most of them are not
prepared for a TV screen.
• Some plug-ins (e.g. to view pages or videos) are not
available on your TV.
• You cannot send or download files.
• Internet pages are shown one page at a time and
full screen.
To start the Internet browser…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Internet and
press OK.
3 - Enter an Internet address and press OK.
4 - To close Internet, press HOME or TV.
17.2
Options on Internet
Some extras are available for the Internet.
To open the extras…
1 - With the Internet app open, press OPTIONS.
2 - Select one of the items and press OK.
3 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Enter Address
To enter a new Internet address.
Show Favourites
To view the pages you marked as favourites.
Reload Page
To load the Internet page again.
Zoom Page
Use the slider bar to set the zoom percentage.
Security Info
To view the security level of the current page.
Mark as Favourite
To mark the current page as a favourite.
55
18
Your Videos, Photos
and Music
18.1
From a USB Connection
You can view your photos or play your music and
videos from a connected USB flash drive or USB Hard
Drive.
With the TV switched on, plug in a USB flash drive or a
USB Hard Drive to one of the USB connections. The
TV detects the device and will list your media files.
If the list of files does not appear automatically…
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and press
OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and press (right) to select
the USB device you need.
3 - You can browse your files in the folder structure
you have organised on the drive.
4 - To stop playing videos, photos and music, press
EXIT.
Warning
If you try to pause or record a programme with a USB
Hard Drive connected, the TV will ask you to format
the USB Hard Drive. This formatting will delete all
current files on the USB Hard Drive.
18.2
From a Computer or NAS
You can view your photos or play your music and
videos from a computer or a NAS (Network Attached
Storage) in your home network.
The TV and computer or NAS must be in the same
home network. On your computer or NAS, you need
to install Media Server Software like Twonky™. Your
Media Server must be set to share your files with the
TV. The TV shows your files and folders as they are
organised by the Media Server or as they are
structured on your computer or NAS.
The TV does not support subtitles on video streams
from a computer or NAS.
If the Media Server supports searching for files, a
search field is available.
To browse and play the files from your computer…
1 - Press SOURCES, select Network and
press OK.
2 - Select 'name of device' and press (right) to
browse and play your files.
3 - To stop playing videos, photos and music, press
EXIT.
18.3
From a Cloud Storage Service
You can view photos or play music and videos you
uploaded on a storage service in the online cloud*.
With the Cloud Explorer app you can connect to
Cloud Hosting Services. You can use your login and
password to connect.
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Cloud
Explorer and press OK.
3 - Select the hosting service you need.
4 - Connect and sign in to the hosting service with
your login and password.
5 - Select the photo or video you want to play and
press OK.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
* A storage service like Dropbox™.
18.4
Play your Videos
Play Videos
How you open the list of your media files on TV
depends on the type of device where the files are
stored. See the chapters above.
To play a video on TV…
Select the file name and press OK.
• To pause the video, press OK. Press OK again to
continue.
• To rewind or go fast forward, press or . Press
the keys several times to speed up - 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x,
32x.
• To jump to the next video in a folder, press OK to
pause and select on screen and press OK.
• To stop the video playback, press (Stop).
• To go back to the folder, press BACK.
Progress Bar
To show the progress bar when a video is playing
(playhead position, duration, title, date, etc.),
press INFO.
Press again to hide the info.
56
Video Options
During the video playback, press OPTIONS to…
• Play All – Play all video files in this filder.
• Play One – Play this video only.
• Shuffle – Play your files in a random order.
• Subtitles – If available, you can switch subtitles On,
Off or On During Mute.
• Subtitle Language – If available, select a Subtitle
Language.
• Audio Language – If available, select an Audio
Language.
• Repeat – Plays all videos in this folder once or
continuously.
18.5
View your Photos
View Photos
How you open the list of your media files on TV
depends on the type of device where the files are
stored. See the chapters above.
To view a photo on TV…
Select the file name and press OK.
If there are several photos in a folder, you can start a
slide show.
To start a slide show…
1 - Select the folder with photos.
2 - Press the colour key Play All .
• To jump to the next or previous photo, press
(right - next) or (left - previous).
• To pause the slide show, press OK. To start again,
press OK again.
• To stop the slide show, press OK and press
BACK.
Info
To view info on a photo (size, creation date, file path,
etc.), select a photo and press INFO.
Press again to hide the info.
Slideshow with Music
You can watch a slideshow of your photos and listen
to your music at the same time. You must start the
usic before you start the photo slideshow.
To play music with the slide show…
1 - Select a song or a folder with songs and press OK.
2 - Press INFO to hide file info and progress bar.
3 - Press BACK.
4 - Now use the navigation arrows to select the
folder with photos.
5 - Select the folder with photos and press Play
All.
6 - To stop the slideshow, press BACK.
Photo Options
With a photo on screen, press OPTIONS to…
• Slide Show – Show photos one after the other.
• Shuffle – Play your files in a random order.
• Repeat – Play the slide show once or continuously.
• Rotate – Rotate the photo to landscape or portrait
format.
• Stop Music – Stop the music playing in the
background.
• Slide Show Speed – Sets the speed of the slide
show.
18.6
Play your Music
Play Music
How you open the list of your media files on TV
depends on the type of device where the files are
stored. See the chapters above.
To play a song on TV…
Select the file name of the song and press OK.
If there are several songs in a folder, you can listen to
them one after the other.
• To pause a song, press OK. Press OK again to
continue.
• To rewind or go fast forward, press or . Press
the keys several times to speed up - 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x,
32x.
• To jump to the next song in a folder, press OK to
pause and select on screen and press OK.
• To go back to the folder, press BACK, the music
will keep on playing.
• To stop the music playback, press (Stop).
Progress Bar
To show the progress bar when a song is playing
(playhead position, duration, title, date, etc.),
press INFO .
Press again to hide the info.
57
Music Options
Colour key functions and Options for playing music.
• Play All – Play all songs in this filder.
• Play One – Play this song only.
• Shuffle – Play your files in a random order.
• Repeat – Plays all songs in this folder once or
continuously.
58
19
Smartphones and
Tablets
19.1
Philips TV Remote App
The new Philips TV Remote App on your smartphone
or tablet is your new TV buddy.
With the TV Remote App, you master your media
around you. Send photos, music or videos to your big
TV screen or watch any of your TV channels live on
your tablet or phone. Look up what you want to
watch on the TV Guide and watch it on your phone or
TV. With the TV Remote App you can use your phone
as a remote control.
Download the Philips TV Remote App from your
favourite app store today.
The Philips TV Remote App is available for iOS and
Android and is free of charge.
Wi-Fi Smart Screen
To watch digital TV channels on your smartphone or
tablet with the Philips TV Remote App, you must
switch on Wi-Fi Smart Screen. In Help, press the
colour key Keywords and look up Wi-Fi Smart
Screen.
19.2
Google Cast
What You Need
If an app on your mobile device has Google Cast, you
can cast your app on this TV. On the mobile app, look
for the Google Cast icon. You can use your mobile
device to control what's on TV. Google Cast works on
Android and iOS.
Your mobile device must be connected to the same
Wi-Fi home network as your TV.
Apps with Google Cast
New Google Cast apps come available every
day. You can already try it with YouTube, Chrome,
Netflix, Photowall … or Big Web Quiz for
Chromecast. See also google.com/cast
Some Google Play products and features aren't
available in all countries.
Find more information
on support.google.com/androidtv
Cast to Your TV
To cast an app to the TV screen…
1 - On your smartphone or tablet, open an app that
supports Google Cast.
2 - Tab the Google Cast icon.
3 - Select the TV you would like to cast to.
4 - Press play on your smartphone or tablet. What
you selected should start playing on TV.
19.3
AirPlay
To add the AirPlay functionality to your Android TV,
you can download and install one of the several
Android apps that do just that. You can find several of
these apps in the Google Play Store.
19.4
MHL
This TV is MHL™ compliant.
If your mobile device is also MHL compliant, you can
connect your mobile device with a MHL cable to the
TV. With the MHL cable connected you can share
what's on your mobile device on the TV screen. Your
mobile device charges its battery at the same time.
The MHL connection is ideal for watching movies or
playing games from your mobile device on TV for a
longer time.
Charging
With the MHL cable connected, your device will
charge while the TV is switched on (not in standby).
MHL Cable
You need a passive MHL cable (HDMI to Micro USB)
to connect your mobile device to the TV. You might
need an extra adapter to connect to your mobile
device. To connect the MHL cable to the TV use
the HDMI 4 MHL connection.
MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link and the MHL Logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the MHL,
LLC.
59
20
Ambilight
20.1
Ambilight Style
Follow Video
You can set Ambilight Projection to follow the video
or the audio dynamics of a TV programme.
Alternatively, you can set Ambilight Projection to
show a preset colour style or you can switch
Ambilight off.
If you select Follow Video, you can select one of the
styles that follow the dynamics of the picture on your
TV screen.
1 - Press AMBILIGHT.
2 - Select Follow Video and press OK.
3 - Select the style you want and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
The available Follow Video styles are…
• Standard
• Extreme
• Relax
• Dome
• Tunnel
• Cube
Shop location
If the TV is set to Shop location, the styles of Follow
Video will change randomly every 30 seconds. You
can always switch back to a style of your preference
in the Follow Video menu. If no other style is
selected after 10 minutes, the random selection of
styles will start again automatically.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Home or Shop Location for more information.
Follow Audio
You can set Ambilight to follow the video or the audio
dynamics of a TV programme. Alternatively, you can
set Ambilight to show a preset colour style or you can
switch Ambilight off.
If you select Follow Audio, you can select one of the
styles that follow the dynamics of the sound.
1 - Press AMBILIGHT.
2 - Select Follow Audio and press OK.
3 - Select the style you want and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
The available Follow Audio styles are…
• Lumina - Mixes audio dynamics with video colours
• Colora - Based on audio dynamics
• Retro - Based on audio dynamics
• Spectrum - Based on audio dynamics
• Scanner - Based on audio dynamics
• Rhytm - Based on audio dynamics
• Party - A mix of all Follow Audio styles, one after
the other
Follow Colour
You can set Ambilight to follow the video or the audio
dynamics of a TV programme. Alternatively, you can
set Ambilight to show a preset colour style or you can
switch Ambilight off.
If you select Follow Colour, you can select one of the
preset colour styles.
1 - Press AMBILIGHT.
2 - Select Follow Colour and press OK.
3 - Select the style you want and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
The available Follow Colour styles are…
• Hot Lava - Red colour variations
• Deep Water - Blue colour variations
• Fresh Nature - Green colour variations
• Warm White - Static colour
• Cool White - Static colour
20.2
Halo Size
You can set the size of the Halo to fit your living room
wall.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Ambilight, Halo Size for more information.
20.3
Ambilight Off
To switch off Ambilight…
1 - Press AMBILIGHT.
2 - Select Off and press OK.
3 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
60
20.4
Ambilight Settings
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Ambilight, Settings for more information.
61
21
Multi View
21.1
Open Multi View
With Multi View, you can watch a second programme
in a small screen.
To open the Multi View screen…
1 - Tune to a TV channel. If you're not watching TV
channels, press TV.
2 - Press to open the small screen and press OK.
3 - Press or to tune to another channel
in the large screen.
4 - Press and press OK to swap the TV channels.
Alternatively, press (down) and press OK to close
the small screen.
Conditions
• Multi View can only show digital TV channels.
• While the TV is recording, Multi View is not available.
• To use Multi View with satellite TV channels, you
must connect the 2 satellite tuners SAT 1 and SAT 2 to
your satellite dish.
• If both TV channels need a CAM to decode, you
must install 2 CAMs to use Multi View.
21.2
Text (Teletext) and TV
You can watch a TV channel in the small screen of
Multi View when you're watching Text (Teletext).
To watch a TV channel while watching Text
(Teletext)…
1 - Press .
2 - Select Multi View: On on screen. The channel
you were watching appears in the small screen.
3 - To hide the small screen, press again and
select Multi View: Off on screen.
62
22
Settings
22.1
Frequent Settings
The most frequently used settings are bundled in the
Frequent Settings menu.
To open the menu…
1 - Press SETTINGS.
2 - Select the setting you want to adjust and press
OK.
3 - Press BACK, if you do not want to change
anything.
22.2
Picture
Quick Setting
During the first installation, you did some picture
settings in a few easy steps. You can redo these steps
with Quick Picture Setting. To do these steps, make
sure the TV can tune to a TV channel or can show a
programme from a connected device.
To set the picture in a few easy steps…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Quick Picture Setting and press OK.
4 - Select Start and press OK. Use the navigation
keys to select your choice.
5 - Finally, select Finish and press OK.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Picture Style
Select a Style
For easy picture adjustment, you can select a preset
Picture Style.
1 - While watching a TV channel,
press SETTINGS, select Picture Style and press
OK.
2 - Select one of the styles in the list and press OK.
3 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
The available styles are…
• Personal - The picture preferences you set during
the first start up.
• Vivid - Ideal for daylight viewing
• Natural - Natural picture settings
• Standard - Most energy conscious setting - Factory
setting
• Movie - Ideal for watching movies
• Photo - Ideal for viewing photos
• ISF Day - For ISF Calibration
• ISF Night - For ISF Calibration
Customise a Style
Any picture setting you adjust, like Colour or Contrast,
is stored in the currently selected Picture Style. It
allows you to customize each style.
Only the style Personal can save its settings for each
connected device in the Sources menu.
Restore a Style
To restore the style to its original setting…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Picture Style and press OK.
4 - Select the style you want to restore and press
OK.
5 - Press the colour key Restore Style . The style
is restored.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Home or Shop
If the Picture Style is switched back to Vivid every
time you switch on the TV, the TV location is set
to Shop. A setting meant for in-store promotion.
To set the TV for Home use…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Location and press OK.
4 - Select Home and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Picture Format
Basic
If the picture is not filling the whole screen, if black
bars are showing on the top or bottom or at both
sides, you can adjust the picture to fill the screen
completely.
To select one of the basic settings to fill the screen…
63
1 - Press SETTINGS.
2 - Select Picture Format and press OK.
3 - Select Fill Screen or Fit to Screen and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Fill Screen – automatically enlarges the picture to fill
the screen. Picture distortion is minimal, subtitles
remain visible. Not suitable for PC input. Some
extreme picture formats can still show black bars.
Fit to Screen – automatically zooms in the picture to
fill the screen without distortion. Black bars may be
visible. Not suitable for PC input.
Advanced
If the two basic settings are inadequate to format the
picture you want, you can use the advanced settings.
With the advanced settings you manually format the
picture on your screen.
You can zoom, stretch and shift the picture until it
shows what you need – e.g. missing subtitles or
scrolling text banners . If you format the picture for a
specific Source – like a connected game console –
you can return to this setting the next time you use
the game console. The TV stores the last setting you
did for each connection.
To format the picture manually…
1 - Press SETTINGS.
2 - Select Picture Format and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced and press OK.
4 - Select Shift, Zoom or Stretch and press OK to
adjust the picture with the navigation keys.
5 - Alternatively, select Last Setting and press OK
to switch to the format you stored before.
6 - Or select Undo to return to the setting the
picture had when you opened Picture Format.
7 - The TV stores your settings as Last Settings when
you press Basic or press BACK to close the
menu.
• Shift – Use the navigation keys to shift the picture.
You can only shift the picture when it is zoomed in.
• Zoom – Use the navigation keys to zoom in.
• Stretch – Use the navigation keys to stretch the
picture vertically or horizontally.
• Last Setting – Returns to the last setting you did for
this connection (source).
• Undo – Returns to the picture format you started
with.
• Original – Shows the original format of the incoming
picture. This is a 1:1 pixel on pixel format. Expert mode
for HD and PC input.
Game or Computer
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Game or Computer for more information.
Picture Settings
Colour
With Colour, you can adjust the colour saturation of
the picture.
To adjust the colour…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Colour and press (right).
4 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Contrast
With Contrast, you can adjust the contrast of the
picture. If you are watching 3D pictures, this setting is
switched to 3D Contrast.
To adjust the contrast…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Contrast and press (right).
4 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Sharpness
With Sharpness, you can adjust the level of sharpness
in fine detail of the picture.
To adjust the sharpness…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Sharpness and press (right).
4 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Advanced Settings
64
Colour Settings
Tint
Colour Enhancement
With Colour Enhancement, you can enhance the
colour intensity and the details in bright colours.
To adjust the level…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Colour > Colour
Enhancement and press OK.
4
- Select Maximum, Medium, Minimum or Off
and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Colour Temperature
With Colour Temperature, you can set the picture to a
preset colour temperature or select Custom to set a
temperature setting yourself with Custom Colour
Temperature. Colour Temperature and Custom
Colour Temperature are settings intended for expert
users.
To select a preset…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Colour > Colour
Temperature and press OK.
4 - Select Normal, Warm or Cool and press OK.
Select Custom and press OK if you want to
customise a colour temperature yourself.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Custom Colour Temperature
With Custom Colour Temperature, you can set a
colour temperature yourself. To set a custom colour
temperature, first select Custom in the Colour
Temperature menu. Custom Colour Temperature is a
setting intended for expert users.
To set a custom colour temperature…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Colour > Custom Colour
Temperature and press (right).
4 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
WP is white point and BL is black level. You can also
select one of the presets in this menu.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
ISF Colour Control
With ISF Colour Control, an ISF expert can calibrate
the colour reproduction of the TV. Colour Control is
an ISF expert setting.
Get the most out of your TV display with ISF®
Calibration. Ask a ISF calibration expert to come to
your home and set the TV to the most optimal picture
setting. Additionally the expert can set an ISF
Calibration for Ambilight.
Ask your dealer for an ISF Calibration.
Calibration benefits are…
• better picture clarity and sharpness
• better detail in bright and dark parts
• deeper and darker blacks
• better colour purity and quality
• reduced energy consumption
The ISF Calibration expert stores and locks the ISF
settings as 2 picture styles.
When the ISF Calibration is done, press SETTINGS
and select Picture Style and and press OK.
Select ISF Day or ISF Night and press OK. Select ISF
Day to watch TV during bright light conditions or
select ISF Night when it's dark.
ISF RGB Only Mode
With RGB only mode, an ISF expert can switch the
screen to RGB colours only.
Contrast Settings
Contrast Mode
With Contrast Mode, you can set the level at which
power consumption can be reduced by dimming the
intensity of the screen. Choose for the best power
consumption or for the picture with the best intensity.
To adjust the level…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Contrast > Contrast Mode
and press OK.
4 - Select Best Power, Best
Picture, Standard or Off and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
65
Dynamic Contrast
With Dynamic Contrast, you can set the level at
which the TV automatically enhances the details in
the dark, middle and light areas of the picture.
To adjust the level…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Contrast > Dynamic
Contrast and
select Maximum, Medium, Minimum or Off and
press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Brightness
With Brightness, you can set the level of brightness of
the picture signal. Brightness is a setting intended for
expert users. We recommend non-expert users to
adjust the brightness of the picture with the Contrast
setting.
To adjust the level…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Contrast > Brightness and
press (right).
4 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Video Contrast
With Video Contrast, you can decrease the range of
the video contrast. Video Contrast is a setting
intended for expert users.
To adjust the level…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Contrast > Video Contrast
and press (right).
4 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Light Sensor
The Light Sensor adjusts the picture and Ambilight
settings automatically to the lighting conditions of the
room. You can switch Light Sensor on or off.
To switch on or off…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Contrast > Light Sensor,
and press OK.
4 - Select On or Off and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Gamma
With Gamma, you can set a non-linear setting for
picture luminance and contrast. Gamma is a setting
intended for expert users.
To adjust the level…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Contrast > Gamma and
press (right).
4 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Sharpness Settings
Ultra Resolution
With Ultra Resolution, you switch on a superior
sharpness in line edges and contours.
To switch on or off…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Sharpness > Ultra
Resolution and press OK.
4 - Select On or Off and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Noise Reduction
With Noise Reduction, you can filter out and reduce
the level of image noise.
To adjust the noise reduction…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Sharpness > Noise
Reduction and press OK.
4 - Select Maximum, Medium, Minimum or Off and
press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
66
MPEG Artefact Reduction
With MPEG Artefact Reduction, you can smoothen
the digital transitions in the picture. MPEG artefacts
are mostly visible as small blocks or jagged edges in
images.
To reduce the MPEG artefacts…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Sharpness > MPEG Artefact
Reduction and press OK.
4 - Select Maximum, Medium, Minimum or Off and
press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Motion Settings
Perfect Natural Motion
With Perfect Natural Motion, you can reduce the
motion judder, visible in movies on TV. Perfect Natural
Motion makes any movement smooth and fluent.
To adjust the motion judder…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Motion > Perfect Natural
Motion and press OK.
4 - Select Maximum, Medium, Minimum or Off and
press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Natural Motion
With Natural Motion, you can reduce the motion
judder, visible in movies on TV. Natural Motion makes
any movement smooth and fluent.
To adjust the motion judder…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Motion > Natural
Motion and press OK.
4 - Select Maximum, Medium, Minimum or Off and
press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Clear LCD
With Clear LCD, you switch on a superior motion
sharpness, better black level, high contrast with a
flicker-free, quiet image and a larger viewing angle.
To switch on or off…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Motion > Clear LCD and
press OK.
4 - Select On or Off and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
HDMI Ultra HD
You can watch videos filmed or made in 'native' Ultra
HD resolution - 3840x2160 pixels - on this
TV. Connect devices that play Ultra HD video to one
of the HDMI connectors.
Problems with devices connected with HDMI
This is an Ultra HD TV. Some older devices -
connected with HDMI - do not recognise an Ultra HD
TV electronically and might not work correctly or
show distorted picture or sound. To avoid the
malfunctioning of such a device, you can set the
signal quality to a level the device can handle. If the
device is not using Ultra HD signals, you can switch
off Ultra HD for this HDMI connection.
To set the signal quality…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press OK.
3 - Select HDMI Ultra HD and press OK.
4 - Select UHD 4:4:4/4:2:2 (highest UHD
quality), UHD 4:2:0 or Off and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
22.3
Sound
Sound Style
Select a Style
For easy so und adjustment, you can select a preset
setting with Sound Style.
1 - While watching a TV channel,
press SETTINGS and select Sound Style and
press OK.
2 - Select one of the styles in the list and press OK.
3 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
67
BACK to close the menu.
The available styles are…
• Personal - The sound preferences you set during
the first start up.
• Original - Most neutral sound setting
• Movie - Ideal for watching movies
• Music - Ideal for listening to music
• Game - Ideal for gaming
• News - Ideal for speech
Customise a Style
Any sound setting you adjust, like Treble or Bass, is
stored in the currently selected Picture Style. It allows
you to customize each style.
Only the style Personal can save its settings for each
connected device in the Sources menu.
Restore a Style
To restore the style to its original setting…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press OK.
3 - Select Sound Style and press OK.
4 - Select the style you want to restore and press
OK.
5 - Press the colour key Restore Style . The style
is restored.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Speakers
Select your Speakers
In this menu you can switch the TV speakers on or off.
If you connect a Home Theatre System or a wireless
Bluetooth speaker, you can select which device is
playing the TV sound. All available loudspeaker
systems are shown in this list.
If you use an HDMI CEC connection for an audio
device (like a Home Theatre System), you can select
EasyLink Autostart. The TV will switch on the audio
device, send the TV sound to the device and switch
off the TV speakers.
To select the speakers you want…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select Speakers and press
OK.
2 - Select the loudspeaker system you want and
press OK.
3 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Wireless Speakers (Bluetooth)
What You Need
You can connect a wireless device with Bluetooth® to
this TV – a wireless speaker, a subwoofer, a sound
bar or headphones. You can also connect a wireless
gamepad with Bluetooth LE.
To play the TV sound on a wireless speaker, you must
pair the wireless speaker with the TV. You can pair
some wireless speakers and a maximum of 4
Bluetooth LE (low energy) devices. The TV can only
play the sound on one speaker at a time. If you
connect a subwoofer, the sound is played on the TV
and the subwoofer. If you connect a sound bar the
sound is played on the sound bar only.
Attention - Audio to Video syncronisation
Many Bluetooth speaker systems have a high, so
called, 'latency'. High latency means that the audio
lags behind the video, causing unsynchronised 'lip
sync'. Before you purchase a wireless Bluetooth
speaker system, inform yourself about the newest
models and look for a device with a low latency
rating. Ask your dealer for advice.
For more information on how to pair a wireless
speaker, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Bluetooth, Pairing.
Pairing a Speaker
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Bluetooth, Pairing for more information on pairing
wireless devices.
Remove a Speaker
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Bluetooth, Remove device for more information
on how to unpair (remove) a wireless Bluetooth
device.
Subwoofer Volume
If you connect a wireless Bluetooth subwoofer, you
can slightly increase or decrease the volume of the
subwoofer.
To adjust the volume a little…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Sound > Wireless Speakers > Subwoofer
Volume and press (right).
3 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
68
Bluetooth On or Off
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Bluetooth, on or off for more information on the
Bluetooth On or Off setting.
Problems
Lost connection
• Position the wireless speaker within a range of 5
meters from the TV.
• Places with a high amount of wireless activity -
apartments with lots of wireless routers - can hamper
the wireless connection. Keep the router and wireless
speaker as close to the TV as possible.
Audio and Video syncronisation
• Before you purchase a wireless Bluetooth speaker,
inform yourself about its quality of Audio to Video
syncronisation, commonly called 'lip sync'. Not all
Bluetooth devices perform correctly. Ask your dealer
for advice.
Sound Settings
Bass
With Bass, you can adjust the level of low tones in the
sound.
To adjust the level…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press OK.
3 - Select Bass and press (right).
4 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Treble
With Treble, you can adjust the level of high tones in
the sound.
To adjust the level…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press OK.
3 - Select Treble and press (right).
4 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Headphone Volume
With Headphones Volume, you can set the volume of
a connected headphone separately.
To adjust the volume…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press OK.
3 - Select Headphone Volume and press (right).
4 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Surround Mode
With Surround Mode, you can set the sound effect of
the TV speakers.
To set the surround mode…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press OK.
3 - Select Surround Mode and press OK.
4 - Select Stereo or Incredible Surround and press
OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Advanced Settings
Auto Volume Levelling
With Auto Volume Levelling, you can set the TV to
automatically level out sudden volume differences.
Typically at the beginning of adverts or when you are
switching channels.
To switch on or off…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Auto Volume Levelling and
press OK.
4 - Select On or Off and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Speakers
In this menu you can switch the TV speakers on or off.
If you connect a Home Theatre System or a wireless
Bluetooth speaker, you can select which device is
playing the TV sound. All available loudspeaker
systems are shown in this list.
If you use an HDMI CEC connection for an audio
device (like a Home Theatre System), you can select
69
EasyLink Autostart. The TV will switch on the audio
device, send the TV sound to the device and switch
off the TV speakers.
To select the speakers you want…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select Speakers and press
OK.
2 - Select the loudspeaker system you want and
press OK.
3 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Clear Sound
With Clear Sound, you improve the sound for speech.
Ideal for news programmes. You can switch the
speech improvement on or off.
To switch on or off…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Clear Sound and press OK.
4 - Select On or Off and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Audio Out Format
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Audio Out Format for more information.
Audio Out Levelling
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Audio Out Levelling for more information.
Audio Out Delay
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Audio Out Delay for more information.
Audio Out Offset
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Audio Out Offset for more information.
TV Placement
As part of the first installation, this setting is set to
either On a TV stand or On the Wall. If you have
changed the placement of the TV since then, adjust
this setting accordingly for best sound reproduction.
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Sound and press OK.
3 - Select TV Placement and press OK.
4 - Select On a TV Stand or On the Wall and press
OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
22.4
Ambilight
Ambilight Style
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Ambilight Style for more information.
Ambilight Off
To switch off Ambilight…
1 - Press AMBILIGHT.
2 - Select Off and press OK.
3 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Ambilight Settings
Halo Size
You can set the size of the Halo to fit your living room
wall.
To set the Halo size…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight > Halo Size and press
(right).
3 - Select Small, Medium or Large and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Brightness
You can set the level of brightness of the Ambilight.
To adjust the level…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
70
press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight > Brightness and press
(right).
3 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Saturation
You can set the level of colour saturation of the
Ambilight.
To adjust the level…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight > Saturation and press
(right).
3 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Ambilight+hue
What You Need
With Ambilight+hue, you can set up your Philips Hue
lamps to follow the Ambilight colours of the TV. The
Philips Hue lamps will expand the Ambilight effect
across the room. If you don’t have any Philips Hue
lamps yet, buy the Philips Hue Starter Kit (includes a
Hue Bridge and 3 Hue bulbs) and install the bulbs
and Bridge. You can buy extra Philips Hue bulbs
separately.
To set up Ambilight+hue on your TV you need…
• a Philips Hue Bridge
• a few Philips Hue bulbs
• this TV connected to your home network
You can do the complete Ambilight+hue setup on TV
and don’t need the Ambilight+hue App.
If you do download the free Ambilight+hue App on
your smartphone or tablet later, you can use this App
to adjust some Ambilight+hue settings.
Configure
Step 1 - Network
In this first step, you will prepare the TV to find the
Philips Hue Bridge. The TV and the Philips Hue
Bridge must use the same network.
Setting up…
1 - Connect the Philips Hue Bridge to the power
outlet.
2 - Connect the Philips Hue Bridge to the same
router you are using for the TV — use an Ethernet
cable to connect.
3 - Switch on the Hue bulbs.
To start the configuration…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Ambilight > Ambilight+hue and press OK.
3 - Select Configure and press OK.
4 - Select Start and press OK. The TV will search for
the Philips Hue Bridge. If the TV is not yet connected
to your network, the TV will start the network setup
first. If the Philips Hue Bridge appears in the list …
go to Step 2 - Hue Bridge.
For more info on connecting the TV to your home
network, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Network, wireless.
Step 2 - Hue Bridge
In the next step, you will link up the TV with the
Philips Hue Bridge.
The TV can only be linked up to one Hue Bridge.
To link the Hue Bridge…
1 - With the TV connected to your home network, it
will show the available Hue Bridges. If the TV did not
find your Hue Bridge yet, you can select Scan
again and press OK.
If the TV found the only Hue Bridge you have, select
the Hue Bridge name and press OK.
If you have more than one Hue Bridge available,
select the Hue Bridge you want to use and press OK.
2 - Select Start and press OK.
3 - Now go to the Philips Hue Bridge and press the
link button in the middle of the device. This will link
the Hue Bridge with the TV. Do this within 30
seconds. The TV will confirm if a Hue Bridge is now
linked to the TV.
4 - Select OK and press OK.
With the Philips Hue bridge linked to the TV, go to
page Hue bulbs.
Step 3 - Hue Bulbs
In the next step, you will select the Philips Hue bulbs
that have to follow the Ambilight.
You can select a maximum of 9 Philips Hue bulbs for
Ambilight+hue.
To select the bulbs for Ambilight+hue…
1 - In the list, mark the bulbs that have to follow the
Ambilight. To mark a bulb, select the bulb name and
press OK. When you mark a bulb, the bulb will blink
once.
2 - When you’re done, select OK and press OK.
With the bulbs marked for Ambilight+hue, go to page
71
Configure bulb.
Step 4 - Configure Bulb
In the following step, you will configure each Philips
Hue bulb.
To configure each Hue bulb…
1 - Select a bulb to configure and press OK. The
bulb you selected is flashing.
2 - Select Start and press OK.
3 - First indicate where you placed the bulb relative
to the TV. A correct setting of the Angle will send the
correct Ambilight colour to the bulb. Select the slider
bar to adjust the position.
4 - Secondly, indicate the Distance between the
bulb and the TV. The further away from the TV, the
weaker the Ambilight colour. Select the slider bar to
adjust the distance.
5 - Finally, set the Brightness of the bulb. Select the
slider bar to adjust the brightness.
6 - To stop configuring this bulb, select OK and
press OK.
7 - In the Configure Ambilight+hue menu, you can do
the same for each bulb.
8 - When all Ambilight+hue bulbs are configured,
select Finish and press OK.
Ambilight+hue is ready for use.
Switch On or Off
You can switch off the Ambilight+hue effect on the
bulbs. The bulbs will light up white.
To switch off Ambilight+hue…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select Ambilight+hue and
press OK.
2 - Select Off or On and press OK.
3 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Immersion
You can adjust the level of the Ambilight effect for the
Ambilight+hue bulbs.
To adjust the Ambilight+hue Immersion…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight > Ambilight+hue and press OK.
3 - Select Immersion and press (right).
4 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
View Configuration
In View configuration, you can consult the current
Ambilight+hue configuration. Which network you use,
how many bulbs are connected, etc.
To view the current Ambilight+hue setup…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight > Ambilight+hue and press OK.
3 - Select View Configuration and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Reset Configuration
You can reset (uninstall) the complete Ambilight+hue
configuration in one go.
To reset the Ambilight+hue configuration…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight > Ambilight+hue and press OK.
3 - Select Reset Configuration and press OK. The
configuration is reset.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Lounge Light
With the TV on standby, you can switch on Lounge
Light. Lounge Light is Ambilight without video. You
can also switch on Lounge Light when the TV is
switched on but the screen is switched off to save
energy — like when you are listening to a radio
station.
Standby
With the TV in standby, press AMBILIGHT to
switch on Lounge Light. Press again to toggle
through the different colour schemes as you can find
them in the Follow Colour menu. Press again to
switch off.
Screen Off
With the TV switched on but the TV screen switched
off, press AMBILIGHT to switch on Lounge
Light. With the AMBILIGHT key you can toggle
through the audio style set in the Follow Audio menu
or the colour scheme set in the Follow Colour
menu. Press again to switch off.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Screen Off for more information on how to
switch off the screen to save energy while you are
listening to a radio station.
72
Advanced
Wall Colour
With Wall Colour, you can neutralise the influence of
a coloured wall on the Ambilight colours. Select the
colour of the wall behind the TV and the TV will
modify the Ambilight colours to appear as they are
intended.
To select the colour of the wall . . .
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight > Advanced and press OK.
3 - Select Wall Colour and press OK.
4 - Select the colour that matches the colour of the
wall behind the TV and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
TV Switch Off
With TV Switch Off, you can set Ambilight to switch
off immediately or slowly fade out when you switch
off the TV. The slow fade out gives you some time to
switch on the lights in your living room.
To select the way how Ambilight switches off…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Ambilight > Advanced and press OK.
3 - Select TV Switch Off and press OK.
4 - Select Fade Out to Off or Immediate Switch Off
and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
ISF Tuning
When an ISF expert calibrates the TV, a static
Ambilight colour can be calibrated. You can select
any colour you want to calibrate. With the ISF
Calibration done, you can select the static ISF colour.
To select the ISF static colour…
Press (Ambilight) and select ISF and press OK.
For more information, press the colour
key Keywords and look up ISF® Calibration.
22.5
Eco Settings
Energy Saving
If you select Energy Saving, the TV switches to Picture
Style - Standard automatically, the most ideal energy
conscious setting for the picture and Ambilight.
To set the TV in Energy Saving…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Eco Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Energy Saving, the Picture Style is set to
Standard automatically. The setting is marked with a
(leave).
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Screen Off
If you use the TV to listen to music, you can switch off
the TV screen to save energy.
To switch off the TV screen…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Eco Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Screen Off and press OK. The screen will
switch off.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
To switch the screen back on, press any key on the
remote control.
Light Sensor
To save energy, the built-in ambient light sensor
lowers the brightness of the TV screen when the
surrounding light darkens. The built-in light sensor
automatically adjusts the picture, together with
Ambilight, to the lighting conditions of the room.
To activate the light sensor…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Eco Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Light Sensor and press OK. When the
Light Sensor is activated, the setting is marked with
a (leave).
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
73
Switch Off Timer
If the TV receives a TV signal but you don't press a
key on the remote control during a 4 hour period, the
TV switches off automatically to save energy. Also, if
the TV does not receive a TV signal nor a remote
control command for 10 minutes, the TV switches off
automatically.
If you use the TV as a monitor or use a digital receiver
to watch TV (a Set-Top Box - STB) and you do not
use the remote control of the TV, you should
deactivate this automatic switch off.
To deactivate the Switch Off Timer …
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Eco Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Switch Off Timer and press (right).
4 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
The value 0 (Off) deactivates the automatic switch
off.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
22.6
General Settings
Philips Logo Brightness
You can switch off or adjust the brightness of the
Philips logo on the front of the TV.
To adjust or switch off…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Philips Logo Brightness and press OK.
4 - Select Maximum, Medium, Minimum or Off and
press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Home or Shop
If you use the TV at home, set the location to Home. If
you use the TV in a shop, set the location to Shop. In
location Shop, the Picture Style is set to Vivid
automatically. The automatic Switch Off Timer is
switched off.
To set the TV location…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Location and press OK.
4 - Select Home or Shop and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Shop Setup
If the TV is set to Shop, some settings were set
automatically. You can change these shop settings in
Shop Setup.
To set the Shop Setup…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Shop Setup and press OK.
4 - Change the settings according to your
preference.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Demo Me
To present the picture and sound quality of this TV,
you can play a stored video clip.
To play the demonstration video clip…
1 - Press .
2 - Select Demo Me and press OK. The video clip will
start playing.
You can use this video clip to check on the picture
and sound quality of the TV. The TV switches to the
factory settings when playing the video clip.
EasyLink
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up EasyLink for more information on EasyLink.
Advanced
TV Guide Data
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up TV Guide Data for more information.
Channel Logos
In some countries, the TV can show the channel
logos.
If you do not want these logos to appear, you can
switch them off.
To switch off the logos…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Advanced > Channel Logos and press OK.
74
4 - Select On or Off and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
HbbTV
If a TV channel offers HbbTV pages, you must first
switch on HbbTV in the TV settings to view the pages.
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select General Settings > HbbTV and
press OK.
3 - Select On and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
If you want to avoid access to HbbTV pages on a
specific channel, you can block the HbbTV pages for
this channel only.
1 - Tune to the channel of which you want to block
the HbbTV pages.
2 - Press OPTIONS and select HbbTV on This
Channel and press OK.
3 - Select Off and press OK.
Factory Settings
You can set the TV back to the original TV settings
(the factory settings) for picture, sound and Ambilight.
To switch back to the original settings…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Factory Settings and press OK.
4 - Select Ok and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Reinstall TV
You can redo a full TV installation.
To redo a full TV installation…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Reinstall TV and press OK.
4 - Follow the instructions on screen. The installation
may take a few minutes.
22.7
Language, Region and Clock
Menu Language
Change the language back to your language.
1 - Press (the round key above the OK key).
2 - Select the icon (Settings) and press OK.
3 - Press 5 times (down).
4 - Press 3 times (right), select your language and
press OK.
5 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Language preferences
Preferred Subtitle Language
A digital broadcast can offer several subtitle
languages for a programme. You can set a preferred
primary and secondary subtitle language. If subtitles
in one of these languages are available, the TV will
show the subtitles you selected.
To set the primary and secondary subtitle language…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and
select Languages > Primary Subtitles or Secondary
Subtitles.
3 - Select the language you need and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Preferred Audio Language
A digital broadcast can offer several audio languages
(spoken languages) for a programme. You can set a
preferred primary and secondary audio language. If
audio in one of these languages is available, the TV
will switch to the audio language.
To set the primary and secondary audio language…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and
select Languages > Primary Audio or Secondary
Audio.
3 - Select the language you need and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
75
Clock
Date and Time
Automatic
The standard setting for the TV clock is Automatic.
The time information comes from the broadcasted
UTC - Coordinated Universal Time information.
If the clock is not correct, you can set the TV clock to
Country Dependent. For some countries, you can
select a specific time zone or set a time offset. In
some countries, for some network operators, the
clock settings are hidden to avoid an incorrect clock
setting.
To set the TV clock…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and select
Clock > Auto Clock Mode and press OK.
3 - Select Automatic or Country Dependent and
press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Manual
If none of the automatic settings display the time
correctly, you can set the time manually.
However, if you schedule recordings from the TV
Guide, we recommend not to change the time and
date manually. In some countries, for some network
operators, the clock settings are hidden to avoid an
incorrect clock setting.
To set the TV clock manually (if available)…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and select
Clock > Auto Clock Mode and press OK.
3 - Select Manual and press OK.
4 - Press (left) and select Date or Time and press
OK.
5 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Time Zone
For some countries, you can select specific time
zones to set the TV clock correctly.
To set the time zone (if available)…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and
select Clock and press OK.
3 - Select Time Zone and press OK.
4 - According to your country, you can select a time
zone or set a time offset to correct the TV clock.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Sleep Timer
With the Sleep Timer, you can set the TV to switch to
standby automatically after a preset time.
To set the Sleep Timer…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select General Settings, select Sleep Timer and
press (right). With the slider bar you can set the
time to up to 180 minutes in increments of 5 minutes.
If set to 0 minutes, the Sleep Timer is switched off.
You can always switch off your TV earlier or reset the
time during the countdown.
3 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Remote Control Keyboard
The standard layout of the Remote Control Keyboard
is Qwerty.
Azerty keyboard
Depending on your region, the Remote Control
Keyboard can be set to Azerty. The Azerty characters
are shown at the top right of the relevant keys.
To set the keyboard layout to Azerty…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language > Remote Control
Keyboard.
3 - Select Azerty or Qwerty and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Cyrillic keyboard
Depending on your region, the Remote Control
Keyboard can be switched to Cyrillic characters.
The Cyrillic characters are shown at the top right of
the keyboard keys.
To write Cyrillic characters…
1 - Press on the remote control.
2 - Press again to switch back to Qwerty.
76
22.8
Universal Access
Switch On
With Universal Access switched on, the TV offers
extra features for the deaf, hard of hearing, blind or
partially sighted people.
Switch on
If you did not switch on Universal Access during the
installation, you can still switch it on. With Universal
Access switched on, the option Universal Access is
added in the Options menu.
To switch on Universal Access…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Universal Access and press (right) to
select Universal Access and press OK.
3 - Select On and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Hard of Hearing
Some digital TV channels broadcast special audio and
subtitles adapted for the hard of hearing or deaf
people. With Hearing impaired switched on, the TV
automatically switches to the adapted audio and
subtitles, if available. Before you can switch on
Hearing impaired, you have to switch on Universal
Access.
To switch on Hearing impaired…
1 - While watching a TV channel, press OPTIONS,
select Universal Access and press OK.
2 - Select Hearing impaired, select On and press OK.
To check whether a hearing impaired audio language
is available, press OPTIONS, select Audio
Language and look for an audio language marked
with a .
If Accessibility does not appear in the Options menu,
switch on Universal Access in Settings. For more
information, press Keywords and look up
Universal Access, switch on.
Audio Description
Switch On
Digital TV channels can broadcast special audio
commentary describing what is happening on screen.
To be able to set the visually impaired audio and
effects, you have to switch on Audio Description first.
Also, before you can switch on Audio Description, you
have to switch on Universal Access in the Settings
menu.
With Audio Description, a narrator's commentary is
added to the normal audio.
To switch on the commentary (if available)…
1 - While watching a TV channel, press OPTIONS.
2 - Select Universal Access > Audio Description and
press OK.
3 - Select On and press OK.
You can check if an audio commentary is available.
In the Options menu, select Audio Language and look
for an audio language marked with a .
Mixed Volume
You can mix the volume of the normal audio with the
audio commentary.
To mix the volume…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Universal Access , select Audio
Description and press OK.
3 - With Audio Description switched on, you can
select Mixed Volume and press OK.
4 - Press (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
If an audio language with added audio commentary is
available, you can also find this setting
in OPTIONS > Accessibility > Mixed Volume.
Audio Effects
Some audio commentary can hold extra audio
effects, like stereo or fading sound.
To switch on Audio Effects (if available)…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Universal Access , select Audio
Description and press OK.
3 - With Audio Description switched on, you can
select Audio Effects and press OK.
4 - Select On and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Speech
The audio commentary can also hold subtitles for the
words which are spoken.
To switch on these subtitles (if available) . . .
77
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Universal Access , select Audio
Description and press OK.
3 - With Audio Description switched on, you can
select Audio Effects and press OK.
4 - Select Descriptive or Subtitles and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
22.9
Child Lock
Parental Rating
To prevent children from watching a programme not
suitable for their age, you can set an age rating.
Digital channels can have their programmes age
rated. When the age rating of a programme is equal to
or higher than the age you have set as age rating for
your child, the programme will be locked. To watch a
locked programme, you must enter the Child Lock
PIN code first.
To set an age rating…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Child Lock > Parental Rating.
3 - Enter the 4-digit Child lock PIN code. If you did
not set a code yet, select Set code in Child Lock.
Enter a 4-digit Child lock PIN code and confirm. Now
you can set an age rating.
4 - Back in Parental Rating, select an age and
press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
To switch off the parental age rating, select None.
However, in some countries you must set an age
rating.
For some broadcasters/operators, the TV only locks
programmes with a higher rating. The parental age
rating is set for all channels.
App Lock
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Lock Apps for more information.
Set Code / Change Code
The Child Lock PIN code is used to lock or unlock
channels or programmes. If the TV didn't ask you to
enter a PIN code yet, you can set the Child Lock PIN
code here.
To set the lock code or to change the current code…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Child Lock, select Set Code or Change
Code and press OK.
3 - Enter a 4 digit code of your choice. If a code is set
already, enter the current Child Lock code and then
enter the new code twice.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
The new code is set.
Forgot your PIN Code?
If you forgot your PIN code, you can override the
current code and enter a new code.
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Child Lock, select Set Code or Change
Code and press OK.
3 - Enter the overriding code 8888.
4 - Now enter a new Child Lock PIN code and enter it
again to confirm.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
22.10
Wireless and Networks
Network
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Network, for more information on connecting the
TV to a network.
Bluetooth
What You Need
You can connect a wireless device with Bluetooth® to
this TV – a wireless speaker, a subwoofer, a sound
bar or headphones. You can also connect a wireless
gamepad with Bluetooth LE.
To play the TV sound on a wireless speaker, you must
pair the wireless speaker with the TV. You can pair
some wireless speakers and a maximum of 4
Bluetooth LE (low energy) devices. The TV can only
78
play the sound on one speaker at a time. If you
connect a subwoofer, the sound is played on the TV
and the subwoofer. If you connect a sound bar the
sound is played on the sound bar only.
Attention - Audio to Video syncronisation
Many Bluetooth speaker systems have a high, so
called, 'latency'. High latency means that the audio
lags behind the video, causing unsynchronised 'lip
sync'. Before you purchase a wireless Bluetooth
speaker system, inform yourself about the newest
models and look for a device with a low latency
rating. Ask your dealer for advice.
For more information on how to pair a wireless
speaker, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Bluetooth, pairing.
Pairing a Device
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Bluetooth, pairing for more information on pairing
wireless devices.
Select a Device
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Bluetooth, select device for more information on
how to select a wireless speaker.
Remove a Device
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Bluetooth, remove device for more information
on how to unpair (remove) a wireless Bluetooth
device.
Bluetooth On or Off
To connect wireless Bluetooth devices, make sure
Bluetooth is switched on.
To switch Bluetooth on…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and press OK.
3 - Select Bluetooth, select Bluetooth On/Off and
press OK.
4 - Select On or Off and press OK.
5 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
22.11
Android Settings
You can set or view several Android specific settings
or information. You can find the list of apps installed
on your TV and the storage space they need. You can
set the language you like to use with Voice. You can
configure the onscreen keyboard or allow apps to use
your location. Explore the different Android settings.
You can go
to www.support.google.com/androidtv for more
information on these settings.
To open these settings…
1 - Press HOME, scroll down and select
General Settings and press OK.
2 - Press (right), select Android Settings and press
OK.
3 - Explore the different Android settings.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
79
23
Channel Installation
23.1
Antenna/Cable Installation
Update Channels
Automatic Channel Update
If you receive digital channels, you can set the TV to
automatically update these channels.
Once a day, at 6 AM, the TV updates the channels
and stores new channels. New channels are stored in
the Channels List and are marked with a .
Channels without a signal are removed. The TV must
be in standby to automatically update channels. You
can switch off Auromatic Channel Update.
To switch off the automatic update…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Channels, select Antenna/Cable
Installation and press OK.
3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Automatic Channel Update and
press Ok.
5 - Select Off and press OK.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
When new channels are found or if channels are
updated or removed, a message is shown at TV start
up. To avoid this message to appear after every
channel update, you can switch it off.
To switch off the message…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Channels, select Antenna/Cable
Installation and press OK.
3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Channel Update Message and press Ok.
5 - Select Off and press OK.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
In certain countries, the Automatic channel update is
done while watching TV or on any moment when the
TV is in standby.
Manual Channel Update
You can always start an channel update yourself.
To start a channel update manually…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Channels, select Antenna/Cable
Installation and press OK.
3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Search for Channels and press OK.
5 - Select Update Digital Channels, select Next and
press OK.
6 - Select Start and press OK to update the digital
channels. This can take a few minutes.
7 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Reinstall Channels
Reinstall All Channels
You can reinstall all channels and leave all other TV
settings untouched.
If a PIN code is set, you will need to enter this code
before you can reinstall channels.
To reinstall channels…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Channels, select Antenna/Cable
Installation and press OK.
3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Search for Channels and press OK.
5 - Select Reinstall Channels, select Next and press
OK.
6 - Select the country where you are now and press
OK.
7 - Select Next and press OK.
8 - Select the type of installation you want, Antenna
(DVB-T) or Cable (DVB-C) and press OK.
7 - Select Next and press OK.
10 - Select the type of channels you want, Digital
and Analogue Channels or Only Digital Channels and
press OK.
7 - Select Next and press OK.
12 - Select Start and press OK to update the digital
channels. This can take a few minutes.
13 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Reinstall TV
You can redo a full TV installation. The TV is
completely reinstalled.
To redo a full TV installation…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select General Settings, select Reinstall TV and
press OK.
3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Yes and press OK to confirm.
5 - The TV will reinstall completely. The installation
80
can take a few minutes.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Factory Settings
You can set the TV back to the original TV settings
(the factory settings) for picture, sound and Ambilight.
To switch back to the original settings…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select General Settings, select Factory
Settings and press OK.
3 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Channel List Copy
Introduction
Channel List Copy is intended for dealers and expert
users. In some countries, Channel List Copy is only
available for copying satellite channels.
With Channel List Copy, you can copy the channels
installed on one TV onto another Philips TV of the
same range. With Channel List Copy, you avoid the
time-consuming channel search by uploading a
predefined channel list on a TV. Use a USB flash drive
of minimum 1 GB.
Conditions
• Both TVs are from the same year range.
• Both TVs have the same hardware type. Check the
hardware type on the TV type plate on the back of
the TV. Typically noted as Q . . . LA
• Both TVs have compatible software versions.
Current channel version
To check the current version of the channel list…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Channels, select Channel List Copy,
select Current Version and press OK.
3 - Press OK to close.
Current software version
To check the current version of the TV software…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Update Software, select Current
Software Info and press OK.
3 - The version, release notes and creation date are
shown. Also, the Netflix ESN Number is shown if
available.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Copy a Channel List
To copy a channel list…
1 - Switch on the TV. This TV should have channels
installed.
2 - Plug in a USB flash drive.
3 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
4 - Select Channels, select Channel List Copy,
select Copy to USB and press OK. Enter your PIN
code if necessary.
5 - When copying is done, unplug the USB flash
drive.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Now you can upload the copied channel list onto
another Philips TV.
Upload a Channel List
To not Installed TVs
Depending on whether your TV is already installed or
not, you must use a different method to upload a
channel list.
To a TV that is not yet installed
1 - Plug in the power plug to start the installation and
select language and country. You can skip the
channel search. Finish the installation.
2 - Plug in the USB flash drive that holds the channel
list of the other TV.
3 - To start the channel list upload,
press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
4 - Select Channels, select Channel List Copy,
select Copy to TV and press OK. Enter your PIN
code if necessary.
5 - The TV notifies you if the channel list is copied to
the TV successfully. Unplug the USB flash drive.
To Installed TVs
Depending on whether your TV is already installed or
not, you must use a different method to upload a
channel list.
To an already installed TV
1 - Verify the country setting of the TV. (To verify this
setting, see chapter Reinstall All Channels. Start this
procedure until you reach the country setting. Press
BACK to cancel the installation.)
If the country is correct continue with step 2.
If the country is not correct, you need to start a
reinstallation. See chapter Reinstall All Channels and
start the installation. Select the correct country and
skip the channels search. Finish the installation. When
done, continue with step 2.
81
2 - Plug in the USB flash drive that holds the channel
list of the other TV.
3 - To start the channel list
upload, press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
4 - Select Channels, select Channel List Copy,
select Copy to TV and press OK. Enter your PIN
code if necessary.
5 - The TV notifies you if the channel list is copied to
the TV successfully. Unplug the USB flash drive.
DVB-T or DVB-C
DVB-T or DVB-C Reception
During the channel installation, just before you search
for channels, you selected Antenna (DVB-T) or Cable
(DVB-C). Antenna DVB-T searches for terrestrial
analogue channels and digital DVB-T/T2 channels.
Cable DVB-C searches for analogue and digital
channels available from a cable DVB-C operator.
DVB-C Channel Installation
For ease of use, all DVB-C settings are set to
automatic.
For some countries the TV can enter the network ID of
the operator automatically. If the DVB-C installation
then fails, restart the installation and enter the
network ID and/or network frequency values you
received from the DVB-C operator when the TV asks
for them during the installation.
Channel Number Conflicts
In some countries, different TV channels
(broadcasters) might have the same channel number.
While installing, the TV shows the list with channel
number conflicts. You need to select which TV
channel you want to install on a channel number with
multiple TV channels.
DVB Settings
Network Frequency Mode
If you intend to use the fast Quick Scan method in
Frequency Scan to search for channels, select
Automatic. The TV will use 1 of the predefined
network frequencies (or HC - homing channel) as
used by most cable operator in your country.
If you received a specific network frequency value to
search for channels, select Manual.
Network Frequency
With the Network Frequency Mode set to Manual,
you can enter the network frequency value received
from your cable operator here. To enter the value, use
the number keys.
Frequency Scan
Select the method of searching for channels. You can
select the faster Quick Scan method and use the
predefined settings used by most cable operator in
your country.
If this results in having no channels installed or if
some channels are missing, you can select the
extended Full Scan method. This method will take
more time to search for and install channels.
Frequency Step Size
The TV searches for channels in steps of 8MHz.
If this results in having no channels installed or if
some channels are missing, you can search in smaller
steps of 1MHz. Using the 1MHz steps will take more
time to search for and install channels.
Digital Channels
If you know your cable operator is not offering digital
channels, you can skip searching for digital channels.
Select Off.
Analogue Channels
If you know your cable operator is not offering
analogue channels, you can skip searching for
analogue channels.
Select Off.
Free / Scrambled
If you have a subscription and a CAM - Conditional
Access Module for pay TV services, select Free +
Scrambled. If you did not subscribe to pay TV
channels or services, you can select Free
Channels Only .
For more information, press the colour
key Keywords and look up CAM - Conditional
Access Module.
82
Reception Quality
You can check the quality and signal strength of a
digital channel. If you have your own antenna, you
can reposition the antenna to try and improve the
reception.
To check the reception quality of a digital channel…
1 - Tune to the channel.
2 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
3 - Select Channels, select Antenna/Cable
Installation and press OK. Enter your PIN code if
necessary.
4 - Select Digital: Reception Test and press OK.
5 - Select Search and press OK. The digital
frequency is shown for this channel.
6 - Select Search again and press OK to check the
signal quality of this frequency. The test result is
shown on screen. You can reposition the antenna or
check the connections to possibly improve the
reception.
7 - You can also change the frequency
yourself. Select the frequency number one by one
and use the (up) or (down) keys to change
the value. Select Search and press OK to test the
reception again.
8 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Manual Installation
Analogue TV channels can be manually installed,
channel by channel.
To install analogue channels manually…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Channels , select Antenna/Cable
Installation and press OK. Enter your PIN code if
necessary.
3 - Select Analogue: Manual Installation and press
OK.
• System
To set up the TV system, select System.
Select your country or the part of the world where
you are now and press OK.
• Search Channel
To find a channel, select Search Channel and press
OK. You can enter a frequency yourself to find a
channel or let the TV search for a channel. Press
(right) to select Search and press OK to search for a
channel automatically. The found channel is shown
on screen and if the reception is poor, press Search
again. If you want to store the channel,
select Done and press OK.
• Store
You can store the channel on the current channel
number or as a new channel number.
Select Store Current Channel or Store as New
Channel and press OK. The new channel number is
shown briefly.
You can redo these steps until you have found all
available analogue TV channels.
23.2
Satellite Installation
Installing Satellites
About Installing Satellites
This TV has two built-in satellite DVB-S/DVB-S2
tuners.
Up to 4 Satellites
You can install up to 4 satellites (4 LNBs) on this TV.
Select the exact number of satellites you wish to
install at the start of the installation. This will speed up
the installation.
Unicable
You can use a Unicable system to connect the
antenna dish to the TV. You can select Unicable for 1
or for 2 satellites at the start of the installation.
MDU - Multi-Dwelling-Unit
The built-in satellite tuners support MDU on the Astra
satellites and for Digiturk on the Eutelsat satellite.
MDU on Türksat is not supported.
Start the Installation
Make sure your satellite dish is connected correctly
and is perfectly aligned before you start the
installation.
To start the satellite installation…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Channels and press OK.
3 - Select Satellite Installation and press OK. Enter
your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Search for Satellite and press OK.
5 - Select One Tuner or Two Tuners and press OK.
The TV has 2 built-in satellite tuners. Make your
selection according to how many satellite dish cables
you have available.
6 - Select Next and press OK.
In the next screen you can start searching for
satellites. The current installation setting is
mentioned on screen. Before you start searching for
satellites, you can change or check the installation
83
settings. See next chapter Satellite Installation
Settings.
To start searching for satellites…
1 - Select Search and press OK. The TV will search for
the satellites available on the alignment of your
antenna dish. This may take a few minutes. If a
satellite is found, its name and reception strenght are
shown on screen.
2 - If the TV shows the satellite(s) you want, select
Install and press OK. If the TV did not find the
satellite(s) you expected to find, the dish alignment
might be altered or a cable might be disconnected.
You can select Search Again and press OK.
3 - If a satellite offers Channel Packages, the TV will
show the available packages for that satellite. Select
the package you need and press OK.
4 - Select Next and press OK. Some packages offer
a Quick or Full install for their available channels,
select one or the other. The TV will install the satellite
channels and radio stations.
5 - To store the satellite setup and installed channels
and radio stations, select Finish and press OK.
Satellite Installation Settings
The satellite installation settings are preset according
your country. These settings determine how the TV
searches and installs satellites and its channels. You
can always change these settings.
To change the satellite installation settings…
1 - Start the satellite installation.
2 - On the screen where you can start searching for
satellites, select Settings and press OK.
3 - Select the number of satellites you want to install
or select one of the Unicable systems. When you
select Unicable, you can choose the User Band
Numbers and enter the User Band Frequencies for
each tuner.
4 - When you're done, select Next and press OK.
5 - On the Settings menu, press the colour key
Done to return to the screen to start searching for
satellites.
Homing Transponder and LNB
In some countries, you can adjust the expert settings
for homing transponder and each LNB. Only use or
change these settings when a normal installation fails.
If you have non-standard satellite equipment, you
can use these settings to overrule the standard
settings. Some providers might give you some
transponder or LNB valeus which you can enter here.
Satellite CAMs
If you use a CAM – a Conditional Access Module with
a smart card – to watch satellite channels, we
recommend to do the satellite installation with the
CAM inserted in the TV.
Most CAMs are used to descramble channels.
Newest generation CAMs (CI+ 1.3 with Operator
Profile), can install all the satellite channels by
themselves on your TV. The CAM will invite you to
install its satellite(s) and channels. These CAMs not
only install and descramble the channels but also
handle regular channel updates.
Channel Packages
Satellites can offer channel packages that bundle free
channels (free-to-air) and offer a sorting that suits a
country. Some satellites offer subscription packages -
a collection of channels you pay for.
If you choose a subscription package, the TV might
ask you to select a Quick or Full installation.
Select Quick to install the channels of the package
only or select Full to install the package and all
other available channels too. We recommend a Quick
installation for subscription packages. If you have
additional satellites that are not part of your
subscription package, we recommend a Full
installation. All installed channels are put in the
channels list All.
Unicable Setup
The Unicable System
You can use a Single Cable system, MDU or Unicable
system to connect the antenna dish to the TV. A
Single Cable system uses one cable to connect the
satellite dish to all satellite tuners in its system. A
Single Cable system is typically used in apartment
buildings. If you use a Unicable system, the TV will ask
you to assign a user band number and corresponding
frequency during the installation. You can install 1 or 2
satellites with Unicable on this TV.
If you notice some missing channels after a Unicable
installation, another installation might have been
done at the same moment on the Unicable system.
Do the installation again to install the missing
channels.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Unicable, connect for more information.
84
User Band Number
In a Unicable system, each connected satellite tuner
must be numbered (e.g. 0, 1, 2 or 3 etc.).
You can find the available user bands and their
number on the Unicable switchbox. User band is
sometimes shortened as UB. There are Unicable
switchboxes that offer 4 or 8 user bands. If you select
Unicable in the settings, the TV will ask you to assign
the unique user band number for each built-in
satellite tuners. A satellite tuner cannot have the same
user band number as another satellite tuner in the
Unicable system.
User Band Frequency
Next to the unique user band number, the built-in
satellite receiver needs the frequency of the selected
user band number. These frequencies are mostly
shown next to the user band number on a Unicable
switchbox.
Automatic Channel Update
If you have digital satellite channels installed, you can
set the TV to automatically update these channels.
Once a day, at 6 AM, the TV updates the channels
and stores new channels. New channels are stored in
the Channels List and are marked with a .
Channels without a signal are removed and if a
satellite operator reorders its channel package, the
channel list of the TV will be updated. The TV must
be in standby to automatically update channels. You
can switch off Automatic Channel Update.
To switch off the automatic update…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Channels and press OK.
3 - Select Satellite Installation and press OK. Enter
your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Automatic Channel Update and press OK.
5 - Select Off and press OK.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
You can set the TV to only update the channels of a
specific satellite.
To mark satellites for updating…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and press
OK.
2 - Select Channels and press OK.
3 - Select Satellite Installation and press OK. Enter
your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Automatic Update Option and press OK.
5 - In the list of satellites, select a satellite and press
OK to mark or unmark.
6 - Select Off and press OK.
7 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
In certain countries, the automatic channel update is
done while watching TV or on any moment when the
TV is in Standby.
Manual Channel Update
You can always start an channel update yourself.
To start a channel update manually…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Satellite Installation and press OK.
3 - Select Search for Satellites and press OK.
4 - Select Update Channels and press OK. The TV
will start updating. The update may take a few
minutes.
5 - Select Finish and press OK.
Add a Satellite
You can add an additional satellite to your current
satellite installation. The installed satellites and their
channels remain untouched. Some satellite operators
do not allow adding a satellite.
The additional satellite should be seen as an extra, it
is not your main satellite subscription or not the main
satellite of which you use its channel package.
Typically, you would add a 4th satellite when you
have 3 satellites already installed. If you have 4
satellites installed, you might consider removing one
first to be able to add a new satellite.
Setup
If you currently have only 1 or 2 satellites installed, the
current installation settings might not allow adding an
extra satellite. If you need to change the installation
settings, you must redo the complete satellite
installation. You cannot use Add satellite if a change
of settings is needed.
To add a satellite…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Satellite Installation and press OK.
3 - Select Search for Satellites and press OK.
4 - Select Add Satellite and press OK. The current
satellites are shown.
5 - Select Search and press OK. The TV will search
for new satellites.
6 - If the TV has found one or more satelittes, select
Install and press OK. The TV installs the channels of
the found satellites.
85
7 - Select Finish and press OK to store the channels
and radio stations.
Remove a Satellite
You can remove one or more satellites from your
current satellite installation. You remove the satellite
and its channels. Some satellite operators do not
allow removing a satellite.
To remove satellites…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Satellite Installation and press OK.
3 - Select Search for Satellites and press OK.
4 - Select Remove Satellite and press OK. The
current satellites are shown.
5 - Select a satellite and press OK to mark or unmark
them to remove.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Manual Installation
Manual Installation is intended for expert users.
You can use Manual Installation to test the signal
strenght of an LNB. You can test the signal through
each tuner individually, tuner 1 (Sat 1) or tuner 2 (Sat
2).
Alternatively, you can use Manual Installation to
quickly add new channels from a satellite
transponder. You can only add channels on tuner 1
(Sat 1). To add channels, you need to know the
frequency and polarization of the transponder. The
TV will install all channels of that transponder. If the
transponder was installed before, all its channels -
the former and the new ones - are moved to the end
of the channel list All.
You cannot use Manual installation if you need to
change the number of satellites. If this is needed, you
have to do a complete installation with Install
Satellites.
To test an LNB or store channels from a transponder…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Satellite Installation and press OK.
3 - Select Manual Installation and press OK.
4 - Select Tuner and press OK.
5 - Select the tuner you want to test and press OK.
6 - If you have more than 1 satellite installed, select
the satellite/LNB for which you want to test or add
channels and press OK.
7 - Select Polarization and press OK. Select the
polarization you need and press OK.
8 - If you set the Symbol Rate Mode to Manual, you
can enter the symbol rate in Symbol Rate manually.
9 - Select Search and press OK. The signal strenght
is shown on screen.
10 - If you want to store the channels of a new
transponder, select Store and press OK.
11 - Press (left) to go back one step or press
BACK to close the menu.
Homing Transponder and LNB
In some countries, you can adjust the expert settings
for homing transponder and each LNB. Only use or
change these settings when a normal installation fails.
If you have non-standard satellite equipment, you
can use these settings to overrule the standard
settings. Some providers might give you some
transponder or LNB valeus which you can enter here.
LNB Power
By default, LNB Power is set to On.
22 kHz Tone
By default, the Tone is set to Auto.
Low LO Frequency / High LO Frequency
The local oscillator frequencies are set to standard
values. Adjust the values only in case of exceptional
equipment that needs different values.
Problems
The TV cannot find the satellites I want or the TV
installs the same satellite twice
• Make sure that the correct number of satellites is set
in Settings at the start of the installation. You can set
the TV to search for One, Two or 3/4 satellites.
A dual head LNB cannot find a second satellite
• If the TV finds one satellite but cannot find a second
one, turn the dish a few degrees. Align the dish to get
the strongest signal on the first satellite. Check the
signal strength indicator of the first satellite on screen.
With the first satellite set at the strongest signal, select
Search again to find the second satellite.
• Make sure the settings are set to Two Satellites.
Changing the installation settings did not solve my
problem
• All settings, satellites and channels are only stored
at the end of the installation when you finish.
All satellite channels are gone
• If you use a Unicable system, make sure you
assigned two unique user band numbers for both
built-in tuners in the Unicable settings. It might be
that another satellite receiver in your Unicable system
is using the same user band number.
86
Some satellite channels seem to have disappeared
from the channel list
• If some channels seem to be gone or displaced, the
broadcaster might have changed the transponder
location of these channels. To restore the channel
positions in the channel list, you can try an update of
the channel package.
I cannot remove a satellite
• Subscription packages do not allow removing a
satellite. To remove the satellite, you have to do a
complete installation again and select another
package.
Sometimes the reception is poor
• Check if the satellite dish is solidly mounted. Strong
winds can move the dish.
• Snow and rain can degrade the reception.
87
24
Software
24.1
Update Software
Update from Internet
If the TV is connected to the Internet, you may receive
a message to update the TV software. You need a
high-speed (broadband) Internet connection. If you
receive this message, we recommend you to carry out
the update.
With the message on screen, select Update and
follow the instructions on screen.
You can also ook for a software update yourself.
During the software update, there is no picture and
the TV will switch off and on again. This might happen
several times. The update can take a few minutes.
Wait until the TV picture comes back up. Do not press
the power switch on the TV or on the remote
control during the software update.
To look for a software update yourself…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Update Software, select Search for
Updates and press OK.
3 - Select Internet and press OK.
4 - The TV will look for an update on the Internet.
5 - If an update is available, you can update the
software right away.
6 - A software update can take several minutes. Do
not press the key on the TV or remote control.
7 - When the update is done, the TV will return to the
channel you were watching.
Update from USB
It might be necessary to update the TV software.
You need a computer with an high-speed Internet
connection and a USB flash drive to upload the
software on the TV. Use a USB flash drive with at least
500MB free space. Make sure that write protection is
switched off.
To update the TV software…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Update Software, select Search for
Updates and press OK.
3 - Select USB and press OK.
Identify the TV
1 - Insert the USB flash drive into one of the USB
connections of the TV.
2 - Select Write to USB and press OK. An
identification file is written on the USB flash drive.
Download the software
1 - Insert the USB flash drive into your computer.
2 - On the USB flash drive, locate the
file update.htm and double click it.
3 - Click Send ID.
4 - If new software is available, download the .zip
file.
5 - After the download, unzip the file and copy the
file autorun … .upg (the name starts with 'autorun…')
onto the USB flash drive. Do not place this file in a
folder.
Update the TV software
1 - Insert the USB flash drive into the TV again. The
update starts automatically.
2 - A software update can take several minutes. Do
not press the key on the TV or remote control. Do
not remove the USB flash drive.
3 - When the update is done, the TV will return to the
channel you were watching.
If a power cut occurs during the update, never
remove the USB flash drive from the TV. When the
power returns, the update will continue.
To prevent an accidental update of the TV software,
delete the autorun … .upg file from the USB flash drive.
24.2
Software Version
To view the current TV software version…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Update Software, select Current
Software Info and press OK.
3 - The version, release notes and creation date are
shown. Also, the Netflix ESN Number is shown if
available.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press to
close the menu.
24.3
Open Source Software
This television contains open source software. TP
Vision Europe B.V. hereby offers to deliver, upon
request, a copy of the complete corresponding
source code for the copyrighted open source
software packages used in this product for which such
offer is requested by the respective licences.
This offer is valid up to three years after product
purchase to anyone in receipt of this information.
To obtain the source code, please write in English to .
. .
88
Intellectual Property Dept.
TP Vision Europe B.V.
Prins Bernhardplein 200
1097 JB Amsterdam
The Netherlands
24.4
Open Source License
README for the source code of the parts of TP Vision
Europe B.V. TV software that fall under open source
licenses.
This is a document describing the distribution of the
source code used on the TP Vision Europe B.V. TV,
which fall either under the GNU General Public
License (the GPL), or the GNU Lesser General Public
License (the LGPL), or any other open source license.
Instructions to obtain copies of this software can be
found in the Directions For Use.
TP Vision Europe B.V. MAKES NO WARRANTIES
WHATSOEVER, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, REGARDING THIS SOFTWARE. TP Vision
Europe B.V. offers no support for this software. The
preceding does not affect your warranties and
statutory rights regarding any TP Vision Europe B.V.
product(s) you purchased. It only applies to this
source code made available to you.
Android (5.0.0)
This tv contains the Android Lollipop Software.
Android is a Linux-based operating system designed
primarily for touchscreen mobile devices such as
smartphones and tablet computers. This software will
also be reused in TPVision Android based TV's.The
original download site for this software is :
https://android.googlesource.com/This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the Apache license version 2, which can
be found below. Android APACHE License Version 2
(http://source.android.com/source/licenses.html)
Busybox (1.18.5)
The original download site for this software is :
http://www.busybox.net/This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
GPL v2 license.
linux kernel (3.10.27)
This tv contains the Linux Kernel.The original
download site for this software is :
http://www.kernel.org/.This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of the GPL
v2 license, which can be found below. Additionally,
following exception applies : "NOTE! This copyright
does *not* cover user programs that use kernel
services by normal system calls - this is merely
considered normal use of the kernel, and does *not*
fall under the heading of "derived work". Also note
that the GPL below is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, but the instance of code that it
refers to (the linux kernel) is copyrighted by me and
others who actually wrote it. Also note that the only
valid version of the GPL as far as the kernel is
concerned is _this_ particular version of the license (ie
v2, not v2.2 or v3.x or whatever), unless explicitly
otherwise stated. Linus Torvalds"
libcurl (7.21.7)
libcurl is a free and easy-to-use client-side URL
transfer library, supporting DICT, FILE, FTP, FTPS,
Gopher, HTTP, HTTPS, IMAP, IMAPS, LDAP, LDAPS,
POP3, POP3S, RTMP, RTSP, SCP, SFTP, SMTP,
SMTPS, Telnet and TFTP. libcurl supports SSL
certificates, HTTP POST, HTTP PUT, FTP uploading,
HTTP form based upload, proxies, cookies,
user+password authentication (Basic, Digest, NTLM,
Negotiate, Kerberos), file transfer resume, http proxy
tunneling and more!The original download site for this
software is : http://curl.haxx.se/libcurl/COPYRIGHT
AND PERMISSION NOTICECopyright (c) 1996 - 2010,
Daniel Stenberg, daniel@haxx.se.All rights
reserved.Permission to use, copy, modify, and
distribute this software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the
above copyright notice and this permission notice
appear in all copies.THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
"AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS. INNO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USEOR OTHER DEALINGS
IN THE SOFTWARE.Except as contained in this notice,
the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or
other dealings in this Software without prior written
authorization of the copyright holder.
libfreetype (2.4.2)
FreeType is a software development library, available
in source and binary forms, used to render text on to
bitmaps and provides support for other font-related
operationsThe original download site for this software
is : https://github.com/julienr/libfreetype-
androidFreetype License
libjpeg (8a)
This package contains C software to implement JPEG
image encoding, decoding, and transcoding.This
software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.----------------------The
89
authors make NO WARRANTY or representation,
either express or implied,with respect to this software,
its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a
particular purpose. This software is provided "AS IS",
and you,its user, assume the entire risk as to its
quality and accuracy.This software is copyright (C)
1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane.All Rights Reserved
except as specified below.Permission is hereby
granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this
software (or portions thereof) for any purpose,
without fee, subject to these conditions:(1) If any part
of the source code for this software is distributed,
then this README file must be included, with this
copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any
additions, deletions, or changes to the original files
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation.(2) If only executable code is
distributed, then the accompanying documentation
must state that "this software is based in part on the
work of the Independent JPEG Group".(3) Permission
for use of this software is granted only if the user
accepts full responsibility for any undesirable
consequences; the authors acceptNO LIABILITY for
damages of any kind.These conditions apply to any
software derived from or based on the IJG code,not
just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you
ought to acknowledge us.Permission is NOT granted
for the use of any IJG author's name or company
name in advertising or publicity relating to this
software or products derived from it. This software
may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG
Group'ssoftware".We specifically permit and
encourage the use of this software as the basis of
commercial products, provided that all warranty or
liability claims are assumed by the product vendor.
libpng (1.4.1)
libpng is the official Portable Network Graphics (PNG)
reference library (originally called pnglib). It is a
platform-independent library that contains C
functions for handling PNG images. It supports almost
all of PNG's features, is extensible.The original
download site for this software is :
https://github.com/julienr/libpng-androidlibpng
license
openssl (1.0.1j)
OpenSSL is an open-source implementation of the
SSL and TLS protocols. The core library, written in the
C programming language, implements the basic
cryptographic functions and provides various utility
functions.The original download site for this software
is : http://openssl.org/OpenSSL license
Zlib compression library (1.2.7)
zlib is a general purpose data compression library. All
the code is thread safe. The data format used by the
zlib library is described by RFCs (Request for
Comments) 1950 to 1952 in the files
http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc1950 (zlib format), rfc1951
(deflate format) and rfc1952 (gzip format) Developed
by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler(C) 1995-2012
Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is
provided 'as-is', without any express or implied
warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable
for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software
for any purpose, including commercial applications,
and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the
following restrictions: 1. The origin of this software
must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that
you wrote the original software. If you use this
software in a product, an acknowledgment in the
product documentation would be appreciated but is
not required. 2. Altered source versions must be
plainly marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This
notice may not be removed or altered from any
source distribution. Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler
jloup@gzip.org madler@alumni.caltech.edu
dvbsnoop (1.2)
dvbsnoop is a DVB / MPEG stream analyzer
program.For generating CRC32 values required for
composing PAT, PMT, EIT sectionsThe original
download site for this software is : https://github.com
/a4tunado/dvbsnoop/blob/master/src/misc/crc32.cG
PL v2
http://dvbsnoop.sourceforge.net/dvbsnoop.html
ezxml (0.8.6)
ezXML is a C library for parsing XML documents.The
original download site for this software is :
http://ezxml.sourceforge.net.Copyright 2004, 2005
Aaron Voisine. This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of the MIT
license, which can be found below.
Protobuf (2.0a)
Protocol Buffers are a way of encoding structured
data in an efficient yet extensible format. Google uses
Protocol Buffers for almost all of its internal RPC
protocols and file formats.The original download site
for this software is :
http://code.google.com/p/protobufCopyright 2008,
Google Inc.All rights reserved.Redistribution and use
in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: * Redistributions of
source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. *
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution. *
Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.THIS SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
90
CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USEOF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.Code generated by the Protocol
Buffer compiler is owned by the owner of the input
file used when generating it. This code is not
standalone and requires a support library to be linked
with it. This support library is itself covered by the
above license.
guava (11.0.2)
The Guava project contains several of Google's core
libraries that we rely on in our Java-based projects:
collections, caching, primitives support, concurrency
libraries, common annotations, string processing, I/O,
and so forth.The original download site for this
software is : http://code.google.com/This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the Apache License version 2.
gSoap (2.7.15)
The gSOAP toolkit is an open source C and C++
software development toolkit for SOAP/XML Web
services and generic (non-SOAP) C/C++ XML data
bindings.Part of the software embedded in this
product is gSOAP software. Portions created by
gSOAP are Copyright 2001-2009 Robert A. van
Engelen, Genivia inc. All Rights Reserved. THE
SOFTWARE IN THIS PRODUCT WAS IN PART
PROVIDED BY GENIVIA INC AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
restlet (2.1.4)
Restlet is a lightweight, comprehensive, open source
REST framework for the Java platform. Restlet is
suitable for both server and client Web applications. It
supports major Internet transport, data format, and
service description standards like HTTP and HTTPS,
SMTP, XML, JSON, Atom, and WADL.The original
download site for this software is :
http://restlet.orgThis piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of the
Apache License version 2.
Opera Web Browser (SDK 3.5)
This TV contains Opera Browser Software.
dlmalloc (2.7.2)
Opera uses Doug Lea's memory allocatorThe original
download site for this software is :
http://gee.cs.oswego.edu/dl/html/malloc.html
double-conversion
Opera uses double-conversion library by Florian
Loitsch, faster double : string conversions (dtoa and
strtod).The original download site for this software is :
http://code.google.com/p/double-
conversionCopyright 2006-2011, the V8 project
authors. All rights reserved.Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met: * Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary
form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with
the distribution. * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor
the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USEOF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
EMX (0.9c)
91
Opera uses EMX, which is an OS/2 port of the gcc
suite. Opera uses modified versions of the sprintf and
sscanf methods from this C library.* The emx libraries
are not distributed under the GPL. Linking an *
application with the emx libraries does not cause the
executable * to be covered by the GNU General
Public License. You are allowed * to change and copy
the emx library sources if you keep the copyright *
message intact. If you improve the emx libraries,
please send your * enhancements to the emx author
(you should copyright your * enhancements similar to
the existing emx libraries).
freetype (2.4.8)
Opera uses freetype FreeType 2 is a software-font
engine that is designed to be small, efficient, highly
customizable and portable, while capable of
producing high-quality output (glyph images).The
original download site for this software is : http://ww
w.freetype.org/freetype2/index.htmlFreetype License
HKSCS (2008)
Opera uses HKSCS: The Government of the Hong
Kong Special Administrative Region HKSCS
mappingsThe original download site for this software
is : http://www.ogcio.gov.hkBefore downloading the
Software or Document provided on this Web page,
you should read the following terms (Terms of Use).
By downloading the Software and Document, you are
deemed to agree to these terms.1. The Government of
the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region
(HKSARG) has the right to amend or vary the terms
under this Terms of Use from time to time at its sole
discretion.2. By using the Software and Document,
you irrevocably agree that the HKSARG may from
time to time vary this Terms of Use without further
notice to you and you also irrevocably agree to be
bound by the most updated version of the Terms of
Use.3. You have the sole responsibility of obtaining
the most updated version of the Terms of Use which
is available in the "Digital 21" Web site (http://www.og
cio.gov.hk/en/business/tech_promotion/ccli/terms/t
erms.htm).4. By accepting this Terms of Use, HKSARG
shall grant you a non-exclusive license to use the
Software and Document for any purpose, subject to
clause 5 below.5. You are not allowed to make copies
of the Software and Document except it is incidental
to and necessary for the normal use of the Software.
You are not allowed to adapt or modify the Software
and Document or to distribute, sell, rent, or make
available to the public the Software and Document,
including copies or an adaptation of them.6. The
Software and Document are protected by copyright.
The licensors of the Government of Hong Kong
Special Administrative Region are the owners of all
copyright works in the Software and Document. All
rights reserved.7. You understand and agree that use
of the Software and Document are at your sole risk,
that any material and/or data downloaded or
otherwise obtained in relation to the Software and
Document is at your discretion and risk and that you
will be solely responsible for any damage caused to
your computer system or loss of data or any other
loss that results from the download and use of the
Software and Document in any manner whatsoever.8.
In relation to the Software and Document, HKSARG
hereby disclaims all warranties and conditions,
including all implied warranties and conditions of
merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose and
non-infringement.9. HKSARG will not be liable for any
direct, indirect, incidental, special or consequential
loss of any kind resulting from the use of or the
inability to use the Software and Document even if
HKSARG has been advised of the possibility of such
loss.10. You agree not to sue HKSARG and agree to
indemnify, defend and hold harmless HKSARG, its
officers and employees from any and all third party
claims, liability, damages and/or costs (including, but
not limited to, legal fees) arising from your use of the
Software and Document, your violation of the Terms
of Use or infringement of any intellectual property or
other right of any person or entity.11. The Terms of Use
will be governed by and construed in accordance
with the laws of Hong Kong.12. Any waiver of any
provision of the Terms of Use will be effective only if
in writing and signed by HKSARG or its
representative.13. If for any reason a court of
competent jurisdiction finds any provision or portion
of the Terms of Use to be unenforceable, the
remainder of the Terms of Use will continue in full
force and effect.14. The Terms of Use constitute the
entire agreement between the parties with respect to
the subject matter hereof and supersedes and
replaces all prior or contemporaneous
understandings or agreements, written or oral,
regarding such subject matter.15.In addition to the
licence granted in Clause 4, HKSARG hereby grants
you a non-exclusive limited licence to reproduce and
distribute the Software and Document with the
following conditions:(i) not for financial gain unless it
is incidental;(ii) reproduction and distribution of the
Software and Document in complete and unmodified
form; and(iii) when you distribute the Software and
Document, you agree to attach the Terms of Use and
a statement that the latest version of the Terms of
Use is available from the "Office of the Government
Chief Information Officer" Web site (http://www.ogcio
.gov.hk/en/business/tech_promotion/ccli/terms/term
s.htm).
IANA (Dec 30 2013)
Opera uses Internet Assigned Numbers Authority:
Character encoding tag names and numbers.The
original download site for this software is :
https://www.iana.org
ICU (3)
Opera uses ICU : International Components for
Unicode: Mapping table for GB18030The original
download site for this software is : http://site.icu-proj
92
ect.org/http://source.icu-
project.org/repos/icu/icu/trunk/license.html
MozTW (1.0)
Opera uses MoxTW : MozTW project: Big5-2003
mapping tables.The original download site for this
software is : https://moztw.orgThis piece of software
is made available under the terms and conditions of
CCPL
NPAPI (0.27)
Opera uses NPAPI : Netscape 4 Plugin API: npapi.h,
npfunctions.h, npruntime.h and nptypes.h. Distributed
as part of the Netscape 4 Plugin SDK.The original
download site for this software is : wiki.mozilla.orgThis
piece of software is made available under the terms
and conditions of mozilla license as described below.
Unicode (4.0)
Opera uses Unicode : Data from the Unicode
character database.The original download site for this
software is : www.unicode.orghttp://www.unicode.org
/copyright.html
Webp (0.2.0)
Opera uses Webp : libwebp is a library for decoding
images in the WebP format. Products may use it to
decode WebP images. The turbo servers will
eventually re-decode images to WebP.The original
download site for this software is :
https://developers.google.com/speed/webp/?csw=1
https://chromium.googlesource.com/webm/libwebp/
Additional IP Rights Grant (Patents)"This
implementation" means the copyrightable works
distributed byGoogle as part of the WebM
Project.Google hereby grants to you a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive,no-charge, royalty-free,
irrevocable (except as stated in this section)patent
license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell,
import,transfer, and otherwise run, modify and
propagate the contents of this implementation of
VP8, where such license applies only to those
patentclaims, both currently owned by Google and
acquired in the future,licensable by Google that are
necessarily infringed by this implementation of VP8.
This grant does not include claims that would be
infringed only as a consequence of further
modification of this implementation. If you or your
agent or exclusive licensee institute or order or agree
to the institution of patent litigation against any entity
(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
alleging that this implementation of VP8 or any code
incorporated within this implementation of VP8
constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement,
or inducement of patent infringement, then any
patent rights granted to you under this License for this
implementation of VP8shall terminate as of the date
such litigation is filed.
FaceBook SDK (3.0.1)
This TV contains Facebook SDK. The Facebook SDK
for Android is the easiest way to integrate your
Android app with Facebook's platform. The SDK
provides support for Login with Facebook
authentication, reading and writing to Facebook APIs
and support for UI elements such as pickers and
dialogs.The original download site for this software is :
https://developer.facebook.com/docs/androidThis
piece of software is made available under the terms
and conditions of the Apache License version 2.
iptables (1.4.7)
iptables is a user space application program that
allows a system administrator to configure the tables
provided by the Linux kernel firewall (implemented as
different Netfilter modules) and the chains and rules it
stores. Different kernel modules and programs are
currently used for different protocols; iptables applies
to IPv4The original download site for this software is :
https://android.googlesource.comThis piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the GPL v2.
libyuv (814)
libyuv is an open source project that includes YUV
conversion and scaling functionality.The original
download site for this software is :
http://code.google.com/p/libyuvThis piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions BSD.
ffmpeg (1.1.1)
This TV uses FFmpeg. FFmpeg is a complete, cross-
platform solution to record, convert and stream audio
and video.The original download site for this software
is : http://ffmpeg.orgThis piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of the GPL
v2 license, which can be found below.
u-boot (2011-12)
U-boot is a boot loader for embedded boards based
on ARM, MIPS and other processors, which can be
installed in a boot ROM and used to initialize and test
the hardware or to download and run application
codeThis piece of software is made available under
the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which
can be found below.
live555 (0.82)
Live555 provides RTP/RTCP/RTSP client.The original
download site for this software is :
http://www.live555.comThis piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
LGPL v2.1 license, which can be found below.
Bluetooth Stack (Bluedroid)
This TV uses Bluetooth stack.The original download
site for this software is :This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of Android
Apache License Version 2.
93
EXIF (NA)
Exif JPEG header manipulation tool.The original
download site for this software is :
http://www.sentex.net/~mwandel/jhead/Portions of
this source code are in the public domainCopyright
(c) 2008, The Android Open Source ProjectAll rights
reserved.Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met: *
Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary form
must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with
the distribution. * Neither the name of The Android
Open Source Project nor the names of its contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written
permission.THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS"
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSSOF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUTOF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OFSUCH
DAMAGE.
EXPAT (2.1.0)
EXPAT is a XML Parser.The original download site for
this software is :
http://expat.sourceforge.netCopyright (c) 1998, 1999,
2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and
Clark CooperCopyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004,
2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.Permission is hereby
granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation
files (the"Software"), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights to
use, copy, modify, merge, publish,distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to the following conditions:The above
copyright notice and this permission notice shall be
included in all copies or substantial portions of the
Software.THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON
INFRINGEMENT.IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS
IN THE SOFTWARE.
neven face recognition library (NA)
This TV uses neven face recognition library which is
used for face recognitionThis piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of
Android Apache License version 2.
Unicode (4.8.1.1)
This TV uses Unicode which specifies the
representation of textThe original download site for
this software is : http://icu-project.orgICU License -
ICU 1.8.1 and laterCOPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION
NOTICECopyright (c) 1995-2008 International
Business Machines Corporation and othersAll rights
reserved.Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, provided that the
above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice
appear in all copies of the Software and that both the
above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice
appear in supporting documentation.THE SOFTWARE
IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN
THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY
SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING
FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
THIS SOFTWARE.Except as contained in this notice,
the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or
other dealings in this Software without prior written
authorization of the copyright holder.All trademarks
and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the
property of their respective owners.
IPRoute2 (NA)
IPRoute2 is used for TCP/IP,Networking and Traffic
control.The original download site for this software is :
94
http://www.linuxfoundation.org/collaborate/workgro
ups/networking/iproute2This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of
GPL V2.
mtpd (NA)
mtpd is used for VPN Network.The original download
site for this software is :
http://libmtp.sourceforge.net/This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of
Apache License version 2.0.
MDNS Responder (NA)
MDNS Responder. The mDNSResponder project is a
component of Bonjour,Apple's ease-of-use IP
networking initiative.The original download site for
this software is : http://www.opensource.apple.com/t
arballs/mDNSResponder/This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of
Apache License version 2.0.
NFC (NA)
NFC Semiconductor's NFC Library. Near Field
Communication (NFC) is a set of short-range wireless
technologies, typically requiring a distance of 4cm or
less to initiate a connection. NFC allows you to share
small payloads of data between an NFC tag and an
Android-powered device, or between two Android-
powered devices.This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of Apache
License version 2.0.
Skia (NA)
Skia is a complete 2D graphic library for drawing Text,
Geometries, and Images.The original download site
for this software is :
http://code.google.com/p/skia/Copyright (c) 2011
Google Inc. All rights reserved.Redistribution and use
in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: * Redistributions of
source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. *
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution. *
Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.THIS SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USEOF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Sonic Audio Synthesis library (NA)
The original download site for this software is :
http://www.sonivoxmi.com/This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of
Apache License version 2.0.
Sqlite (3071100)
The original download site for this software is :
www.sqlite.org.This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of Apache
License version 2.0.
Nuance Speech Recognition engine (NA)
The original download site for this software is :
http://www.nuance.com/This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of
Apache License version 2.0.
C++Standard Template Library library (5)
This TV uses Implementation of the C++ Standard
Template Library.The original download site for this
software is : http://stlport.sourceforge.netBoris
Fomitchev grants Licensee a non-exclusive, non-
transferable, royalty-free license to use STLport and
its documentation without fee.By downloading, using,
or copying STLport or any portion thereof, Licensee
agrees to abide by the intellectual property laws and
all other applicable laws of the United States of
America, and to all of the terms and conditions of this
Agreement.Licensee shall maintain the following
copyright and permission notices on STLport sources
and its documentation unchanged :Copyright
1999,2000 Boris FomitchevThis material is provided
"as is", with absolutely no warranty expressed or
implied. Any use is at your own risk.Permission to use
or copy this software for any purpose is hereby
granted without fee, provided the above notices are
retained on all copies. Permission to modify the code
and to distribute modified code is granted, provided
the above notices are retained, and a notice that the
code was modified is included with the above
copyright notice.The Licensee may distribute binaries
compiled with STLport (whether original or modified)
without any royalties or restrictions.The Licensee may
distribute original or modified STLport sources,
provided that:The conditions indicated in the above
permission notice are met;The following copyright
notices are retained when present, and conditions
provided in accompanying permission notices are
95
met :Copyright 1994 Hewlett-Packard
CompanyCopyright 1996,97 Silicon Graphics
Computer Systems, Inc.Copyright 1997 Moscow
Center for SPARC Technology.Permission to use,
copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its
documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
without fee, provided that the above copyright notice
appear in all copies and that both that copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation. Hewlett-Packard
Company makes no representations about the
suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided "as is" without express or implied
warranty.Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute
and sell this software and its documentation for any
purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that
the above copyright notice appear in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission
notice appear in supporting documentation. Silicon
Graphics makes no representations about the
suitability of this software for any purpose. It is
provided "as is" without express or implied
warranty.Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute
and sell this software and its documentation for any
purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that
the above copyright notice appear in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission
notice appear in supporting documentation. Moscow
Center for SPARC Technology makes no
representations about the suitability of this software
for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express
or implied warranty
svox (NA)
The original download site for this software is :
http://www.nuance.com/This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of
Apache License version 2.0.
tinyalsa (NA)
This TV uses tinyalsa: a small library to interface with
ALSA in the Linux kernelThe original download site for
this software is : http://github.com/tinyalsaCopyright
2011, The Android Open Source ProjectRedistribution
and use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: * Redistributions of
source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. *
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution. *
Neither the name of The Android Open Source
Project nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written
permission.THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY The
Android Open Source Project ``AS IS'' ANDANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL The Android Open Source Project BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAYOUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Vorbis Decompression Library (NA)
This TV uses Tremolo ARM-optimized Ogg Vorbis
decompression library. Vorbis is a general purpose
audio and music encoding format contemporary to
MPEG-4's AAC and TwinVQ, the next generation
beyond MPEG audio layer 3The original download
site for this software is :
http://wss.co.uk/pinknoise/tremoCopyright (c)
2002-2008 Xiph.org FoundationRedistribution and
use in source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:- Redistributions of
source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.-
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.-
Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.THIS SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USEOF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
wpa_supplicant_Daemon (v0.8)
Library used by legacy HAL to talk to wpa_supplicant
96
daemonThe original download site for this software is
: http://hostap.epitest.fi/wpa_supplicant/This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of GPL version 2.
gson (2.3)
Gson is a Java library that can be used to convert
Java Objects into their JSON representation. It can
also be used to convert a JSON string to an
equivalent Java object. Gson can work with arbitrary
Java objects including pre-existing objects that you
do not have source-code of.The original download
site for this software is :
https://code.google.com/p/google-gson/This piece
of software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the Apache License 2.0
This software includes an implementation of the AES
Cipher, licensed by Brian GladmanThe original
download site for this software is :
http://www.gladman.me.uk/This piece of software is
licensed by Brian Gladman
libUpNp (1.2.1)
The original download site for this software is :
http://upnp.sourceforge.net/This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
BSD.
dnsmasq
Dnsmasq is a lightweight, easy to configure DNS
forwarder and DHCP serverThe original download site
for this software is : https://android.googlesource.com
/platform/external/dnmasqThis piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
GPL v2 license, which can be found below.
TomCrypt (1.1)
iwedia stack is using tomcrypt for sw decryptionThe
original download site for this software is : http://man
pages.ubuntu.com/manpages/saucy/man3/libtomcry
pt.3.htmlThis piece of software is made available
under the terms and conditions of the DO WHAT THE
FUCK YOU WANT TO PUBLIC LICENSE
TP Vision Europe B.V. is grateful to the groups and
individuals above for their contributions.
_________________________________
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation,
Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301,
USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is
not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take
away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended
to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
software--to make sure the software is free for all its
users. This General Public License applies to most of
the Free Software Foundation's software and to any
other program whose authors commit to using it.
(Some other Free Software Foundation software is
covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to
freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or
can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and
that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions
that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask
you to surrender the rights. These restrictions
translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a
program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give
the recipients all the rights that you have. You must
make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. And you must show them these terms
so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright
the software, and (2) offer you this license which
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or
modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want
to make certain that everyone understands that there
is no warranty for this free software. If the software is
modified by someone else and passed on, we want
its recipients to know that what they have is not the
original, so that any problems introduced by others
will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by
software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
redistributors of a free program will individually obtain
patent licenses, in effect making the program
proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear
that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free
use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying,
distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
Activities other than copying, distribution and
modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope. The act of running the Program is
not restricted, and the output from the Program is
97
covered only if its contents constitute a work based
on the Program (independent of having been made
by running the Program). Whether that is true
depends on what the Program does.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of
transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
a) You must cause the modified files to carry
prominent notices stating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or
publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived
from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed
as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands
interactively when run, you must cause it, when
started running for such interactive use in the most
ordinary way, to print or display an announcement
including an appropriate copyright notice and a
notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that
you provide a warranty) and that users may
redistribute the program under these conditions, and
telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does
not normally print such an announcement, your work
based on the Program is not required to print an
announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on
the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to
each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights
or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not
based on the Program with the Program (or with a
work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage
or distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this License.
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
on a medium customarily used for software
interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least
three years, to give any third party, for a charge no
more than your cost of physically performing source
distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of
the corresponding source code, to be distributed
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange;
or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as
to the offer to distribute corresponding source code.
(This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial
distribution and only if you received the program in
object code or executable form with such an offer, in
accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form
of the work for making modifications to it. For an
executable work, complete source code means all the
source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts
used to control compilation and installation of the
executable. However, as a special exception, the
source code distributed need not include anything
that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel,
and so on) of the operating system on which the
executable runs, unless that component itself
accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by
offering access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code
from the same place counts as distribution of the
source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object
code.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply and the
section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section has
the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system, which is implemented
by public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on
consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to
distribute software through any other system and a
licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear
what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of
this License.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number.
If the Program specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version",
you have the option of following the terms and
98
conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Program does not specify a version number of this
License, you may choose any version ever published
by the Free Software Foundation.
NO WARRANTY
________________________________
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation,
Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301
USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is
not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It
also counts as the successor of the GNU Library
Public License, version 2, hence the version number
2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take
away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are
intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is
free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License,
applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software
Foundation and other authors who decide to use it.
You can use it too, but we suggest you first think
carefully about whether this license or the ordinary
General Public License is the better strategy to use in
any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to
freedom of use, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the
freedom to distribute copies of free software (and
charge for this service if you wish); that you receive
source code or can get it if you want it; that you can
change the software and use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you are informed that you can do
these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions
that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to
ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions
translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library,
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must
make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. If you link other code with the library,
you must provide complete object files to the
recipients, so that they can relink them with the library
after making changes to the library and recompiling it.
And you must show them these terms so they know
their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we
copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license,
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute
and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very
clear that there is no warranty for the free library.
Also, if the library is modified by someone else and
passed on, the recipients should know that what they
have is not the original version, so that the original
author's reputation will not be affected by problems
that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the
existence of any free program. We wish to make sure
that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of
a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from
a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent
license obtained for a version of the library must be
consistent with the full freedom of use specified in
this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is
covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License.
This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License,
applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite
different from the ordinary General Public License.
We use this license for certain libraries in order to
permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether
statically or using a shared library, the combination of
the two is legally speaking a combined work, a
derivative of the original library. The ordinary General
Public License therefore permits such linking only if
the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The
Lesser General Public License permits more lax
criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public
License because it does Less to protect the user's
freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It
also provides other free software developers Less of
an advantage over competing non-free programs.
These disadvantages are the reason we use the
ordinary General Public License for many libraries.
However, the Lesser license provides advantages in
certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a
special need to encourage the widest possible use of
a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto
standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be
allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is
that a free library does the same job as widely used
non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by
limiting the free library to free software only, so we
99
use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in
non-free programs enables a greater number of
people to use a large body of free software. For
example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-
free programs enables many more people to use the
whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant,
the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less
protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that
the user of a program that is linked with the Library
has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that
program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying,
distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a "work based on
the library" and a "work that uses the library". The
former contains code derived from the library,
whereas the latter must be combined with the library
in order to run.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
A "library" means a collection of software functions
and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked
with application programs (which use some of those
functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software
library or work which has been distributed under
these terms. A "work based on the Library" means
either the Library or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included
without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for
all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and
modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope. The act of running a program using
the Library is not restricted, and output from such a
program is covered only if its contents constitute a
work based on the Library (independent of the use of
the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true
depends on what the Library does and what the
program that uses the Library does.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of
transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry
prominent notices stating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be
licensed at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a
function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other than
as an argument passed when the facility is invoked,
then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
in the event an application does not supply such
function or table, the facility still operates, and
performs whatever part of its purpose remains
meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute
square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-
defined independent of the application. Therefore,
Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied
function or table used by this function must be
optional: if the application does not supply it, the
square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Library, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on
the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to
each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights
or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not
based on the Library with the Library (or with a work
based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this License.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is
irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent
copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of
the code of the Library into a program that is not a
library.
If distribution of object code is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, then offering
equivalent access to copy the source code from the
same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the
source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object
100
code.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with
the Library creates an executable that is a derivative
of the Library (because it contains portions of the
Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The
executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such
executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material
from a header file that is part of the Library, the object
code for the work may be a derivative work of the
Library even though the source code is not. Whether
this is true is especially significant if the work can be
linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a
library. The threshold for this to be true is not
precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters,
data structure layouts and accessors, and small
macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in
length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted,
regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work.
(Executables containing this object code plus
portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library,
you may distribute the object code for the work under
the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing
that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not
they are linked directly with the Library itself.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the
work that the Library is used in it and that the Library
and its use are covered by this License. You must
supply a copy of this License. If the work during
execution displays copyright notices, you must
include the copyright notice for the Library among
them, as well as a reference directing the user to the
copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these
things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete
corresponding machine-readable source code for the
Library including whatever changes were used in the
work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and
2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with
the Library, with the complete machine-readable
"work that uses the Library", as object code and/or
source code, so that the user can modify the Library
and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that
the user who changes the contents of definitions files
in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile
the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking
with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1)
uses at run time a copy of the library already present
on the user's computer system, rather than copying
library functions into the executable, and (2) will
operate properly with a modified version of the
library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified
version is interface-compatible with the version that
the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for
at least three years, to give the same user the
materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a
charge no more than the cost of performing this
distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified
materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of
these materials or that you have already sent this user
a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that
uses the Library" must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable
from it. However, as a special exception, the materials
to be distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form)
with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so
on) of the operating system on which the executable
runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the
license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that
do not normally accompany the operating system.
Such a contradiction means you cannot use both
them and the Library together in an executable that
you distribute.
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of
the same work based on the Library, uncombined
with any other library facilities. This must be
distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of
the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library,
and explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply, and the
section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section has
the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system which is implemented by
public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on
consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to
distribute software through any other system and a
licensee cannot impose that choice.
101
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear
what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of
this License.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number.
If the Library specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version",
you have the option of following the terms and
conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Library does not specify a license version number,
you may choose any version ever published by the
Free Software Foundation.
NO WARRANTY
_______________________________
BSD LICENSE
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS
AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
______________________________
MIT LICENSE
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
_____________________________
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE,
REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for
use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by
Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity
authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the
License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting
entity and all other entities that control, are controlled
by, or are under common control with that entity. For
the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the
power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or
management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or
more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal
Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for
making modifications, including but not limited to
software source code, documentation source, and
configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from
mechanical transformation or translation of a Source
form, including but not limited to compiled object
code, generated documentation, and conversions to
other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in
Source or Object form, made available under the
License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is
included in or attached to the work (an example is
provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in
Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived
from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions,
annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship.
For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works
shall not include works that remain separable from, or
merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the
Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship,
102
including the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative
Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to
Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright
owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized
to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the
purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any
form of electronic, verbal, or written communication
sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including
but not limited to communication on electronic
mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue
tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf
of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and
improving the Work, but excluding communication
that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated
in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a
Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual
or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has
been received by Licensor and subsequently
incorporated within the Work.
Subject to the terms and conditions of this License,
each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free,
irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare
Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly
perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such
Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
Subject to the terms and conditions of this License,
each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free,
irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent
license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell,
import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such
license applies only to those patent claims licensable
by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by
their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their
Contribution(s) with the Work to which such
Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent
litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or
counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a
Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes
direct or contributory patent infringement, then any
patent licenses granted to You under this License for
that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation
is filed.
You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work
or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or
without modifications, and in Source or Object form,
provided that You meet the following conditions:
(a) You must give any other recipients of the Work or
Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry
prominent notices stating that You changed the files;
and
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any
Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright,
patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the
Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that
do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works;
and
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of
its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You
distribute must include a readable copy of the
attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any
part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the
following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed
as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source
form or documentation, if provided along with the
Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by
the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party
notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE
file are for informational purposes only and do not
modify the License. You may add Your own
attribution notices within Derivative Works that You
distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the
NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such
additional attribution notices cannot be construed as
modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your
modifications and may provide additional or different
license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or
distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use,
reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise
complies with the conditions stated in this License.
Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any
Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in
the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the
terms and conditions of this License, without any
additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the
above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the
terms of any separate license agreement you may
have executed with Licensor regarding such
Contributions.
This License does not grant permission to use the
trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product
names of the Licensor, except as required for
reasonable and customary use in describing the origin
of the Work and reproducing the content of the
NOTICE file.
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS"
BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
ANY KIND, either express or implied, including,
without limitation, any warranties or conditions of
TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are
solely responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work
and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of
permissions under this License.
103
In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort
(including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless
required by applicable law (such as deliberate and
grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall
any Contributor be liable to You for damages,
including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or
consequential damages of any character arising as a
result of this License or out of the use or inability to
use the Work (including but not limited to damages
for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure
or malfunction, or any and all other commercial
damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been
advised of the possibility of such damages.
While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works
thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee
for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or
other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with
this License. However, in accepting such obligations,
You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your
sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other
Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify,
defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any
liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such
Contributor by reason of your accepting any such
warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your
work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the
following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed
by brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying
information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text
should be enclosed in the appropriate comment
syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a
file or class name and description of purpose be
included on the same "printed page" as the copyright
notice for easier identification within third-party
archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the
"License"); you may not use this file except in
compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
writing, software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the License for the specific
language governing permissions and limitations under
the License.
_____________________________
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your
convenience. In case of any discrepancy between this
copy and the notices in the file png.h that is included
in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices
immediately following this sentence.
This code is released under the libpng license.
libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.4.1,
February 25, 2010, are Copyright (c) 2004,
2006-2007 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-1.2.5 with the following individual
added to the list of Contributing Authors
Cosmin Truta
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 -
October 3, 2002, are Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn
Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to
the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with
the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with your
enjoyment of the library or against infringement.
There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will
fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This
library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of
satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort
is with the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6,
March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn
Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to
the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with
the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May
1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger
Distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals
added to the list of Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
104
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January
1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat,
Group 42, Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors" is defined as the following set
of individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The
Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all
warranties, expressed or implied, including, without
limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of
fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and
Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect,
incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential
damages, which may result from the use of the PNG
Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of
such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify,
and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for
any purpose, without fee, subject to the following
restrictions:
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the
use of this source code as a component to supporting
the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use
this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not
required but would be appreciated.
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for
convenient use in "about" boxes and the like:
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is
supplied in the files "pngbar.webp.jpg" and "pngbar.jpg
(88x31) and "pngnow.webp.jpg" (98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI
Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the
Open Source Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
glennrp at users.sourceforge.net
February 25, 2010
_____________________________
This software is based in part on the work of the
FreeType Team.
---------------------------
The FreeType Project LICENSE
----------------------------
2006-Jan-27
Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by
David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction
============
The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive
packages; some of them may contain, in addition to
the FreeType font engine, various tools and
contributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType
Project.
This license applies to all files found in such
packages, and which do not fall under their own
explicit license. The license affects thus the FreeType
font engine, the test programs, documentation and
makefiles, at the very least.
This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all
encourage inclusion and use of free software in
commercial and freeware products alike. As a
consequence, its main points are that:
o We don't promise that this software works.
However, we will be interested in any kind of bug
reports. (`as is' distribution)
o You can use this software for whatever you want, in
parts or full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-
free' usage)
o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If
you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must
acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that
you have used the FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of
this software, with or without modifications, in
commercial products. We disclaim all warranties
covering The FreeType Project and assume no
liability related to The FreeType Project.
Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for
a credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this
license. We thus encourage you to use the following
text:
"""
Portions of this software are copyright © <year> The
FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights
reserved.
"""
Please replace <year> with the value from the
FreeType version you actually use.
Legal Terms
===========
--------------
Throughout this license, the terms `package',
`FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive' refer to the
set of files originally distributed by the authors (David
105
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the
`FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta or
final release.
`You' refers to the licensee, or person using the
project, where `using' is a generic term including
compiling the project's source code as well as linking
it to form a `program' or `executable'. This program is
referred to as `a program using the FreeType engine'.
This license applies to all files distributed in the
original FreeType Project, including all source code,
binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated
in the file in its original, unmodified form as
distributed in the original archive. If you are unsure
whether or not a particular file is covered by this
license, you must contact us to verify this.
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by
David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg.
All rights reserved except as specified below.
--------------
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS'
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO
EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED
BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE
FREETYPE PROJECT.
-----------------
This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free,
perpetual and irrevocable right and license to use,
execute, perform, compile, display, copy, create
derivative works of, distribute and sublicense the
FreeType Project (in both source and object code
forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose;
and to authorize others to exercise some or all of the
rights granted herein, subject to the following
conditions:
o Redistribution of source code must retain this
license file (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions,
deletions or changes to the original files must be
clearly indicated in accompanying documentation.
The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files
must be preserved in all copies of source files.
o Redistribution in binary form must provide a
disclaimer that states that the software is based in
part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the
distribution documentation. We also encourage you
to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your
documentation, though this isn't mandatory.
These conditions apply to any software derived from
or based on the FreeType Project, not just the
unmodified files. If you use our work, you must
acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us.
--------------
Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor
you shall use the name of the other for commercial,
advertising, or promotional purposes without specific
prior written permission.
We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or
more of the following phrases to refer to this software
in your documentation or advertising materials:
`FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', `FreeType
library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
As you have not signed this license, you are not
required to accept it. However, as the FreeType
Project is copyrighted material, only this license, or
another one contracted with the authors, grants you
the right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore,
by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType
Project, you indicate that you understand and accept
all the terms of this license.
-----------
There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:
o freetype@nongnu.org
Discusses general use and applications of FreeType,
as well as future and wanted additions to the library
and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in
this list if you haven't found anything to help you in
the documentation.
o freetype-devel@nongnu.org
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design
issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
Our home page can be found at
http://www.freetype.org
--- end of FTL.TXT ---
_____________________________
LICENSE ISSUES
==============
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e.
both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the
original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below
for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are
BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any
license issues related to OpenSSL please contact
openssl-core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
---------------
/===============================================
=====================
Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
106
openssl-core@openssl.org.
"This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL
PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL
PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISEDOF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
================================================
====================
This product includes cryptographic software written
by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product
includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
/
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
/Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)
All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric
Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform
with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-
commercial use as long as the following conditions
are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all
code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL
documentation included with this distribution is
covered by the same copyright terms except that the
holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any
Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should
be given attribution as the author of the parts of the
library used. This can be in the form of a textual
message at program startup or in documentation
(online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
"This product includes cryptographic software written
by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines
from the library being used are not cryptographic
related :-).
"This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically
available version or derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and
put under another distribution licence
[including the GNU Public Licence.]
/
_____________________________
MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 1.1
---------------
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than
patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer
to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform,
sublicense and distribute the Original Code (or
portions thereof) with or without Modifications,
and/or as part of a Larger Work; and
(b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making,
using or selling of Original Code, to make, have made,
use, practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise
dispose of the Original Code (or portions thereof).
(c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a) and (b)
are effective on the date Initial Developer first
distributes Original Code under the terms of this
License.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent
license is granted: 1) for code that You delete from the
107
Original Code; 2) separate from the Original Code; or
3) for infringements caused by: i) the modification of
the Original Code or ii) the combination of the Original
Code with other software or devices.
Subject to third party intellectual property claims,
each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide,
royalty-free, non-exclusive license
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than
patent or trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to
use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense
and distribute the Modifications created by such
Contributor (or portions thereof) either on an
unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as
Covered Code and/or as part of a Larger Work; and
(b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making,
using, or selling of Modifications made by that
Contributor either alone and/or in combination with
its Contributor Version (or portions of such
combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have
made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) Modifications
made by that Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2)
the combination of Modifications made by that
Contributor with its Contributor Version (or portions of
such combination).
(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b)
are effective on the date Contributor first makes
Commercial Use of the Covered Code.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no patent
license is granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has
deleted from the Contributor Version; 2) separate
from the Contributor Version; 3) for infringements
caused by: i) third party modifications of Contributor
Version or ii) the combination of Modifications made
by that Contributor with other software (except as
part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4)
under Patent Claims infringed by Covered Code in the
absence of Modifications made by that Contributor.
The Modifications which You create or to which You
contribute are governed by the terms of this License,
including without limitation Section 2.2. The Source
Code version of Covered Code may be distributed
only under the terms of this License or a future
version of this License released under Section 6.1, and
You must include a copy of this License with every
copy of the Source Code You distribute. You may not
offer or impose any terms on any Source Code
version that alters or restricts the applicable version of
this License or the recipients' rights hereunder.
However, You may include an additional document
offering the additional rights described in Section 3.5.
Any Modification which You create or to which You
contribute must be made available in Source Code
form under the terms of this License either on the
same media as an Executable version or via an
accepted Electronic Distribution Mechanism to
anyone to whom you made an Executable version
available; and if made available via Electronic
Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at
least twelve (12) months after the date it initially
became available, or at least six (6) months after a
subsequent version of that particular Modification has
been made available to such recipients. You are
responsible for ensuring that the Source Code version
remains available even if the Electronic Distribution
Mechanism is maintained by a third party.
You must cause all Covered Code to which You
contribute to contain a file documenting the changes
You made to create that Covered Code and the date
of any change. You must include a prominent
statement that the Modification is derived, directly or
indirectly, from Original Code provided by the Initial
Developer and including the name of theInitial
Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any
notice in an Executable version or related
documentation in which You describe the origin or
ownership of the Covered Code.
(a) Third Party Claims.
If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a
third party's intellectual property rights is required to
exercise the rights granted by such Contributor under
Sections 2.1 or 2.2, Contributor must include a text file
with the Source Code distribution titled "LEGAL"
which describes the claim and the party making the
claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will know
whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such
knowledge after the Modification is made available as
described in Section 3.2, Contributor shall promptly
modify the LEGAL file in all copies Contributor makes
available thereafter and shall take other steps (such
as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups)
reasonably calculated to inform those who received
the Covered Code that new knowledge has been
obtained.
(b) Contributor APIs.
If Contributor's Modifications include an application
programming interface and Contributor has
knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably
necessary to implement that API, Contributor must
also include this information in the LEGAL file.
(c) Representations.
Contributor represents that, except as disclosed
pursuant to Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor believes
that Contributor's Modifications are Contributor's
original creation(s) and/or Contributor has sufficient
rights to grant the rights conveyed by this License.
You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file
of the Source Code. If it is not possible to put such
notice in a particular Source Code file due to its
structure, then You must include such notice in a
location (such as a relevant directory) where a user
would be likely to look for such a notice. If You
created one or more Modification(s) You may add
your name as a Contributor to the notice described in
108
Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License in any
documentation for the Source Code where You
describe recipients' rights or ownership rights relating
to Covered Code. You may choose to offer, and to
charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or
liability obligations to one or more recipients of
Covered Code. However, You may do so only on Your
own behalf, and not on behalf of the Initial Developer
or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear
than any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability
obligation is offered by You alone, and You hereby
agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every
Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial
Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty,
support, indemnity or liability terms You offer.
You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form
only if the requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been
met for that Covered Code, and if You include a
notice stating that the Source Code version of the
Covered Code is available under the terms of this
License, including a description of how and where
You have fulfilled the obligations of Section 3.2. The
notice must be conspicuously included in any notice
in an Executable version, related documentation or
collateral in which You describe recipients' rights
relating to the Covered Code. You may distribute the
Executable version of Covered Code or ownership
rights under a license of Your choice, which may
contain terms different from this License, provided
that You are in compliance with the terms of this
License and that the license for the Executable
version does not attempt to limit or alter the
recipient's rights in the Source Code version from the
rights set forth in this License. If You distribute the
Executable version under a different license You must
make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ
from this License are offered by You alone, not by the
Initial Developer or any Contributor. You hereby agree
to indemnify the Initial Developer and every
Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial
Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such
terms You offer.
You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered
Code with other code not governed by the terms of
this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single
product. In such a case, You must make sure the
requirements of this License are fulfilled for the
Covered Code.
If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the
terms of this License with respect to some or all of the
Covered Code due to statute, judicial order, or
regulation then You must: (a) comply with the terms
of this License to the maximum extent possible; and
(b) describe the limitations and the code they affect.
Such description must be included in the LEGAL file
described in Section 3.4 and must be included with all
distributions of the Source Code. Except to the extent
prohibited by statute or regulation, such description
must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of
ordinary skill to be able to understand it.
This License applies to code to which the Initial
Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A and to
related Covered Code.
Netscape Communications Corporation ("Netscape")
may publish revised and/or new versions of the
License from time to time. Each version will be given a
distinguishing version number.
Once Covered Code has been published under a
particular version of the License, You may always
continue to use it under the terms of that version. You
may also choose to use such Covered Code under
the terms of any subsequent version of the License
published by Netscape. No one other than Netscape
has the right to modify the terms applicable to
Covered Code created under this License.
If You create or use a modified version of this License
(which you may only do in order to apply it to code
which is not already Covered Code governed by this
License), You must (a) rename Your license so that
the phrases "Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL",
"Netscape", "MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar
phrase do not appear in your license (except to note
that your license differs from this License) and (b)
otherwise make it clear that Your version of the
license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla
Public License and Netscape Public License. (Filling in
the name of the Initial Developer, Original Code or
Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall
not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of
this License.)
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE
ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE
COVERED CODE IS FREE OF DEFECTS,
MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE
QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED
CODE IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE
PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE
INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR)
ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF
WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF
THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS
AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS
DISCLAIMER.
(a) such Participant's Contributor Version directly or
indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all rights
granted by such Participant to You under Sections 2.1
and/or 2.2 of this License shall, upon 60 days notice
from Participant terminate prospectively, unless if
within 60 days after receipt of notice You either:
(i)agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually
agreeable reasonable royalty for Your past and future
109
use of Modifications made by such Participant, or (ii)
withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the
Contributor Version against such Participant. If within
60 days of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment
arrangement are not mutually agreed upon in writing
by the parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn,
the rights granted by Participant to You under
Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate at the
expiration of the 60 day notice period specified
above.
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such
Participant's Contributor Version, directly or indirectly
infringes any patent, then any rights granted to You
by such Participant under Sections 2.1(b) and 2.2(b)
are revoked effective as of the date You first made,
used, sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications
made by that Participant.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO
LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL
YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED
CODE, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH
PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE,
COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY
AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR
LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN
INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL
NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL
INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S
NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW
PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as that
term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995),
consisting of "commercial computer software" and
"commercial computer software documentation," as
such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995).
Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R.
227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S.
Government End Users acquire Covered Code with
only those rights set forth herein.
This License represents the complete agreement
concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of
this License is held to be unenforceable, such
provision shall be reformed only to the extent
necessary to make it enforceable. This License shall
be governed by California law provisions (except to
the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise),
excluding its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect
to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of,
or an entity chartered or registered to do business in
the United States of America, any litigation relating to
this License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the
Federal Courts of the Northern District of California,
with venue lying in Santa Clara County, California,
with the losing party responsible for costs, including
without limitation, court costs and reasonable
attorneys' fees and expenses. The application of the
United Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded.
Any law or regulation which provides that the
language of a contract shall be construed against the
drafter shall not apply to this License.
As between Initial Developer and the Contributors,
each party is responsible for claims and damages
arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of
rights under this License and You agree to work with
Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute such
responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is
intended or shall be deemed to constitute any
admission of liability.
Initial Developer may designate portions of the
Covered Code as "Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-
Licensed" means that the Initial Developer permits
you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under
Your choice of the NPL or the alternative licenses, if
any, specified by the Initial Developer in the file
described in Exhibit A.
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.
``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not
use this file except in compliance with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed
on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied. See the License for
the specific language governing rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is
______________________________________.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
________________________.
Portions created by ______________________ are
Copyright (C) _____________________________.
All Rights Reserved.
Contributor(s):
______________________________________.
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
under the terms of the _____ license (the "[___]
License"), in which case the provisions of [______]
License are applicable instead of those above. If you
wish to allow use of your version of this file only
110
under the terms of the [____] License and not to allow
others to use your version of this file under the MPL,
indicate your decision by deleting the provisions
above and replace them with the notice andother
provisions required by the [___] License. If you do not
delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file under either the MPL or the [___]
License."
[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly
from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of
the Original Code. You should use the text of this
Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original
Code Source Code for Your Modifications.]
24.5
Announcements
You can receive an announcement on new TV
software available for download or other software
related issues.
To read these announcements…
1 - Press SETTINGS, select All Settings and
press OK.
2 - Select Update Software,
select Announcements and press OK.
3 - If there is an announcement, you can read it or
select one of the announcements available.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or press to
close the menu.
111
25
Specifications
25.1
Environmental
European Energy Label
The European Energy Label informs you on the
energy efficiency class of this product. The greener
the energy efficiency class of this product is, the
lower the energy it consumes.
On the label, you can find the energy efficiency class,
the average power consumption of this product in use
and the average energy consumption for 1 year. You
can also find the power consumption values for this
product on the Philips website for your country at
www.philips.com/TV
End of Use
Disposal of your old product and batteries
Your product is designed and manufactured with high
quality materials and components, which can be
recycled and reused.
When this crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is
attached to a product it means that the product is
covered by the European Directive 2002/96/EC.
Please inform yourself about the local separate
collection system for electrical and electronic
products.
Please act according to your local rules and do not
dispose of your old products with your normal
household waste. Correct disposal of your old
product helps to prevent potential negative
consequences for the environment and human
health.
Your product contains batteries covered by the
European Directive 2006/66/EC, which cannot be
disposed with normal household waste.
Please find out for yourself about the local rules on
separate collection of batteries because correct
disposal will help to prevent negative consequences
for the environment and human health.
25.2
Power
Product specifications are subject to change without
notice. For more specification details of this product,
see www.philips.com/support
Power
• Mains power : AC 220-240V +/-10%
• Ambient temperature : 5°C to 35°C
• Power saving features : Light sensor, Picture mute
(for radio), Auto switch-off timer, Eco settings menu.
For power consumption info, see chapter Product
Fiche.
The power rating stated on the product typeplate is
the power consumption for this product during
normal household use (IEC 62087 Ed.2). The
maximum power rating, stated between brackets, is
used for electrical safety (IEC 60065 Ed. 7.2).
25.3
Product Fiche
65PUS8901
• Energy Efficiency Class : A+
• Visible Screen Size : 164cm / 65 inch
• On Mode Power Consumption (W) : 124W
• Annual Energy Consumption (kWh) * : 172kWh
• Standby Power Consumption (W) : 0.50W
• Off Mode Power Consumption (W) : 0.30W
• Display Resolution (Pixels) : 3840 x 2160p
* Energy consumption kWh per year, based on the
power consumption of the television operating 4
hours per day for 365 days. The actual energy
consumption depends on how the television is used.
25.4
Operating System
Android OS : Android Lollipop 5.1
25.5
Reception
• Aerial input : 75 Ohm coaxial (IEC75)
• Tuner bands : VHF, UHF, S-Band/Hyperband
• DVB : DVB-T (terrestrial, antenna) COFDM 2k/8k,
DVB-T2, DVB-C (cable) QAM
• Analogue video playback : PAL, SECAM
• Digital video playback : MPEG2 SD/HD (ISO/IEC
13818-2), MPEG4 SD/HD (ISO/IEC 14496-10)
• Digital audio playback (ISO/IEC 13818-3)
• Satellite aerial input : 75 Ohm F-type
112
• Input frequency range : 950 to 2150MHz
• Input level range : -25 to -65 dBm
• DVB-S/S2 symbol rate 2 to 45 Msymbols/s
• LNB : DiSEqC 1.0, support for 1 to 4 LNBs: polarity
selection 13/18V, band selection 22kHz, tone burst
mode supported
• LNB max. current 300 mA.
25.6
Display
Type
Diagonal screen size
• 65PUS8901 : 164 cm / 65 inch
Display resolution
• 3840 x 2160p
Input Resolution
Video formats
Resolution — Refresh rate
• 480i - 60 Hz
• 480p - 60 Hz
• 576i - 50 Hz
• 576p - 50 Hz
• 720p - 50 Hz, 60 Hz
• 1080i - 50 Hz, 60 Hz
• 1080p - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz
• 2160p (4K) - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Computer formats
Resolutions (amongst others)
• 640 x 480p - 60 Hz
• 800 x 600p - 60 Hz
• 1024 x 768p - 60 Hz
• 1280 x 768p - 60 Hz
• 1280 x 800p - 60 Hz
• 1280 x 1024p - 60 Hz
• 1440 x 900p - 60 Hz
• 1680 x 1050p - 60 Hz
• 1920 x 1080p - 60 Hz
• 3840 x 2160p - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz
25.7
Dimensions and Weights
65PUS8901
• without TV stand:
Width 1447 mm - Height 823 mm - Depth 61,5 mm -
Weight ±24 kg
• with TV stands:
Width 1447 mm - Height 914 mm - Depth 287 mm -
Weight ±25 kg
25.8
Connectivity
TV Side
• HDMI 3 in - ARC - HDCP 2.2 - 4K 50/60Hz
• HDMI 4 in - MHL - ARC - HDCP 2.2 - 4K 50/60Hz
• USB 2 - USB 2.0
• USB 3 - USB 3.0 (blue)
• 2x Common Interface slot: CI+/CAM
• Headphones - Stereo mini-jack 3.5mm
TV Rear
• Audio In (DVI to HDMI) - Stereo mini-jack 3.5mm
• SCART: Audio L/R, CVBS in, RGB
• YPbPr : Y Pb Pr, Audio L/R
• Network LAN - RJ45
TV Bottom
• HDMI 1 in - ARC - HDCP 2.2 - 4K 50/60Hz
• HDMI 2 in - ARC - HDCP 2.2 - 4K 50/60Hz
• USB 1 - USB 2.0
• Digital Audio Out - Optical Toslink
• Antenna (75Ω), dual tuner
• Satellite tuner 1
• Satellite tuner 2
• For 8601 Series only - Wireless Audio, for Philips
PTA860
25.9
Sound
• Output power (RMS) : 30W
• Double Ring technology
• Natural Sound
• DTS Premium Sound™
• Dolby Digital Plus®
25.10
Multimedia
Connections
• USB 2.0 / USB 3.0
• Ethernet LAN RJ-45
• Wi-Fi 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (built-in)
• BT2.1 with EDR & BT4.0 with BLE
Supported USB file systems
• FAT 16, FAT 32, NTFS
Playback formats
• Containers : 3GP, AVCHD, AVI, MPEG-PS, MPEG-TS,
MPEG-4, Matroska (MKV), Quicktime (MOV, M4V,
M4A), Windows Media (ASF/WMV/WMA)
• Video Codecs : MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4 Part 2,
MPEG-4 Part 10 AVC (H264), H.265 (HEVC), VC-1,
WMV9
113
• Audio Codecs : AAC, HE-AAC (v1/v2), AMR-NB,
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS Premium
Sound™, MPEG-1/2/2.5 Layer I/II/III (includes MP3),
WMA (v2 to v9.2), WMA Pro (v9/v10)
• Subtitles :
– Formats : SAMI, SubRip (SRT), SubViewer (SUB),
MicroDVD (TXT), mplayer2 (TXT), TMPlayer (TXT)
– Character encodings : UTF-8, Central Europe and
Eastern Europe (Windows-1250), Cyrillic
(Windows-1251), Greek (Windows-1253), Turkish
(Windows-1254), Western Europe (Windows-1252)
• Image Codecs : JPEG, JPS, MPO
• Limitations :
– Maximum supported total bit rate for a media file is
30Mbps.
– Maximum supported video bit rate for a media file
is 20Mbps.
– MPEG-4 AVC (H.264) is supported up to High
Profile @ L5.1.
– H.265 (HEVC) is supported upto Main / Main 10
Profile up to Level 5.1
– VC-1 is supported up to Advanced Profile @ L3.
Supported media server software (DMS)
• You can use any DLNA V1.5 certified media server
software (DMS class).
• You can use the Philips TV Remote app (iOS and
Android) on mobile devices.
Performance may vary, depending on the capabilities
of the mobile device and the software used.
ESD regulations
This apparatus meets performance criteria A for ESD.
In case the apparatus does not recover in file sharing
mode due to electrostatic discharge, user interference
is required.
114
26
Help and Support
26.1
Register your TV
Register your TV and enjoy a range of benefits
including full support (including downloads),
privileged access to information about new products,
exclusive offers and discounts, the chance to win
prizes and even participate in special surveys about
new releases.
Go to www.philips.com/welcome
26.2
Using Help
This TV offers help on screen .
Open Help
Press the key (blue) to open Help immediately.
Help will open on the chapter that is most relevant to
what you are doing or what is selected on TV. To look
up topics alphabetically, press the colour
key Keywords .
To read the Help as a book, select Book.
You can also open Help in the Home menu or TV
menu.
Before you execute the Help instructions, close Help.
To close Help, press the colour key Close .
For some activities, like Text (Teletext), the colour
keys have specific functions and cannot open Help.
TV Help on your tablet, smartphone or computer
To carry out extended sequences of instructions more
easily, you can download the TV Help in PDF format
to read on your smartphone, tablet or
computer. Alternatively, you can print the relevant
Help page from your computer.
To download the Help (user manual) go to
www.philips.com/support
MTK_U+_20151210
26.3
Troubleshooting
Switch On and Remote Control
The TV does not switch on
• Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet.
Wait for one minute then reconnect it.
• Make sure that the power cable is securely
connected.
Creaking sound at startup or switch off
When you are switching the TV on, off or to standby,
you hear a creaking sound from the TV chassis. The
creaking sound is due to the normal expansion and
contraction of the TV as it cools and warms up. This
does not affect performance.
TV does not respond to the remote control
The TV requires some time to start up. During this
time, the TV does not respond to the remote control
or TV controls. This is normal behaviour.
If the TV continues to be unresponsive to the remote
control, you can check if the remote control is working
by means of a mobile phone camera. Put the phone
in camera mode and point the remote control to the
camera lens. If you press any key on the remote
control and you notice the infra red LED flicker
through the camera, the remote control is working.
The TV needs to be checked.
If you do not notice the flickering, the remote control
might be broken or its batteries are low.
This method of checking the remote control is not
possible with remote controls which are wirelessly
paired with the TV.
The TV goes back to standby after showing the
Philips startup screen
When the TV is in standby, a Philips startup screen is
displayed, then the TV returns to standby mode. This
is normal behaviour. When the TV is disconnected
and reconnected to the power supply, the startup
screen is displayed at the next startup. To switch on
the TV from standby, press on the remote control
or on the TV.
The standby light keeps on blinking
Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet.
Wait 5 minutes before you reconnect the power
cable. If the blinking reoccurs, contact Philips TV
Consumer Care.
Channels
No digital channels found during the installation
See the technical specifications to make sure that
your TV supports DVB-T or DVB-C in your country.
Make sure that all cables are properly connected and
that the correct network is selected.
Previously installed channels are not in the channel
115
list
Make sure that the correct channel list is selected.
Picture
No picture or a distorted picture
• Make sure that the antenna is properly connected to
the TV.
• Make sure that the correct device is selected in the
Sources menu.
• Make sure that the device is properly connected.
Sound but no picture
• Make sure that the picture settings are set correctly.
Press SETTINGS, select Picture Style and select
any style.
Poor antenna reception
• Make sure that the antenna is properly connected to
the TV.
• Loud speakers, unearthed audio devices, neon
lights, high buildings and other large objects can
influence reception quality. If possible, try to improve
the reception quality by changing the antenna
direction or moving devices away from the TV.
• If reception on only one channel is poor, fine-tune
this channel with Manual Installation.
Poor picture from a device
• Make sure that the device is connected properly.
• Make sure that the picture settings are set correctly.
Picture settings change after a while
Make sure that Location is set to Home . You can
change and save settings in this mode.
A commercial banner appears
Make sure that Location is set to Home.
Picture does not fit the screen
Change to a different picture format. Press
SETTINGS and select Picture Format.
Picture format keeps changing with different
channels
Select a non 'Auto' picture format.
Picture position is incorrect
Picture signals from some devices may not fit the
screen correctly. Check the signal output of the
connected device.
Computer picture is not stable
Make sure that your PC uses the supported resolution
and refresh rate.
Sound
No sound or poor sound quality
If no audio signal is detected, the TV automatically
switches the audio output off — this does not indicate
malfunction.
• Make sure that the sound settings are correctly set.
• Make sure that all cables are properly connected.
• Make sure that the volume is not muted or set to
zero.
• Make sure that the TV audio output is connected to
the audio input on the Home Theatre System.
Sound should be heard from the HTS speakers.
• Some devices may require you to manually enable
HDMI audio output. If HDMI audio is already enabled,
but you still do not hear audio, try changing the digital
audio format of the device to PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation). Refer to the documentation
accompanying your device for instructions.
Ambilight
Some Ambilight projectors don't work
After a sudden power failure, some of the Ambilight
projectors might not switch on again. Simply pull out
the power plug from the power outlet and insert it
back again after 10 seconds. All projectors should
work again. No need to switch off the TV first.
HDMI and USB
HDMI
• Note that HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection) support can delay the time taken for a TV
to display content from an HDMI device.
• If the TV does not recognise the HDMI device and
no picture is displayed, switch the source from one
device to another and back again.
• If the picture and sound of a device connected with
HDMI is distorted, check if a different HDMI Ultra
HD setting can solve this problem. In Help, press the
colour key Keywords and look up HDMI Ultra
HD.
• If there are intermittent sound disruptions, make
sure that output settings from the HDMI device are
correct.
• If you use an HDMI-to-DVI adapter or HDMI-to-DVI
cable, make sure that an additional audio cable is
connected to AUDIO IN (mini-jack only), if available.
HDMI EasyLink does not work
• Make sure that your HDMI devices are HDMI-CEC
compatible. EasyLink features only work with devices
that are HDMI-CEC compatible.
No volume icon shown
116
• When an HDMI-CEC audio device is connected and
you use the TV Remote Control to adjust the volume
level from the device, this behaviour is normal.
Photos, videos and music from a USB device do not
show
• Make sure that the USB storage device is set to Mass
Storage Class compliant, as described in the storage
device's documentation.
• Make sure that the USB storage device is compatible
with the TV.
• Make sure that the audio and picture file formats are
supported by the TV.
Choppy playback of USB files
• The transfer performance of the USB storage device
may limit the data transfer rate to the TV which
causes poor playback.
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi network not found or distorted
• Microwave ovens, DECT phones or other Wi-Fi
802.11b/g/n devices in your proximity might disturb
the wireless network.
• We recommend using the 5 GHz frequency
(802.11ac) on your router when your TV is placed in
the neighborhood of many other wireless routers
(apartments, etc.).
• Make sure that the firewalls in your network allow
access to the TV's wireless connection.
• For easy installation of your wireless network, do not
hide the name of your router by switching off the
SSID broadcast.
• If the wireless network does not work properly in
your home, you can use the wired network
installation.
Wi-Fi network connection is slow
• Use a high-speed (broadband) Internet connection
for your router.
• Limit the amount of devices that use the same
router.
• Look in your wireless router's user manual for
information on indoor range, transfer rate and other
factors of signal quality.
DHCP
• If the connection fails, you can check the DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) setting of the
router. DHCP should be switched on.
Bluetooth
Unable to pair
• Make sure the device is in pairing mode. Read the
user manual of the device.
• Keep the router and wireless speaker as close to the
TV as possible.
• Places with a high amount of wireless activity -
apartments with lots of wireless routers - can hamper
the wireless connection.
• Trying to pair several devices with the TV at the
same time, may not work.
Bluetooth lost connection
• Always position the wireless speaker within a range
of 5 meters from the TV.
Bluetooth Audio and Video syncronisation
• Before you purchase a wireless Bluetooth speaker,
inform yourself about its quality of Audio to Video
syncronisation, commonly called 'lip sync'. Not all
Bluetooth devices perform correctly. Ask your dealer
for advice.
Internet
Internet does not work
• If the connection with the router is OK, check the
router connection to the Internet.
Wrong Menu Language
Wrong menu language
Change the language back to your language.
1 - Press (the round key above the OK key).
2 - Select the icon (Settings) and press OK.
3 - Press 5 times (down).
4 - Press 3 times (right), select your language and
press OK.
5 - Press BACK to close the menu.
26.4
Online Help
To solve any Philips TV related problem, you can
consult our online support. You can select your
country and enter your product model number.
Go to www.philips.com/support .
On the support site you can find your country's
telephone number to contact us, as well as answers
to frequently asked questions (FAQs). In some
countries, you can chat with one of our colaborators
and ask your question directly or send a question by
email.
You can download new TV software or the user
manual to read on your computer.
117
26.5
Support and Repair
For support and repair, call the Consumer Care
hotline in your country. Our service engineers will take
care of a repair, if necessary.
Find the telephone number in the printed
documentation that came with the TV.
Or consult our website
www.philips.com/support and select your country if
needed.
Support app
You can also look up the Support app in the Apps row
of the Home menu.
Open this app to find the telephone number to
contact us.
TV model number and serial number
You might be asked to provide the TV product model
number and serial number. Find these numbers on
the packaging label or on the type label on the back
or bottom of the TV.
Warning
Do not attemp to repair the TV yourself. This may
cause severe injury, irrepairable damage to your TV or
void your warranty.
118
27
Safety and Care
27.1
Safety
Important
Read and understand all safety instructions before
you use the TV. If damage is caused by failure to
follow instructions, the warranty does not apply.
Risk of Electric Shock or Fire
• Never expose the TV to rain or water. Never place
liquid containers, such as vases, near the TV.
If liquids are spilt on or into the TV, disconnect the TV
from the power outlet immediately.
Contact Philips TV Consumer Care to have the TV
checked before use.
• Never expose the TV, remote control or batteries to
excessive heat. Never place them near burning
candles, naked flames or other heat sources,
including direct sunlight.
• Never insert objects into the ventilation slots or other
openings on the TV.
• Never place heavy objects on the power cord.
• Avoid force coming onto power plugs. Loose power
plugs can cause arcing or fire. Ensure that no strain is
exerted on the power cord when you swivel the TV
screen.
• To disconnect the TV from the mains power, the
power plug of the TV must be disconnected. When
disconnecting the power, always pull the power plug,
never the cord. Ensure that you have full access to
the power plug, power cord and outlet socket at all
times.
Risk of Injury or Damage to the TV
• Two people are required to lift and carry a TV that
weighs more than 25 kg or 55 lbs.
• If you mount the TV on a stand, only use the
supplied stand or a stand designed for this particular
TV model (see type number). Secure the stand to the
TV tightly. Place the TV, mounted on a stand, on a
flat, level and stable surface that can support the
weight of the TV and the stand.
• External force on the TV housing or TV screen
(weight or impact) can cause temporary deformation
of the picture or permanent damage.
• When wall mounted, ensure that the wall mount can
safely bear the weight of the TV set. TP Vision bears
no responsibility for improper wall mounting that
results in accident, injury or damage.
• Parts of this product are made of glass. Handle with
care to avoid injury or damage.
Risk of damage to the TV !
Before you connect the TV to the power outlet,
ensure that the power voltage matches the value
printed on the back of the TV. Never connect the TV
to the power outlet if the voltage is different.
Risk of Injury to Children
Follow these precautions to prevent the TV from
toppling over and causing injury to children:
• Never place the TV on a surface covered by a cloth
or other material that can be pulled away.
• Ensure that no part of the TV hangs over the edge of
the mounting surface.
• Never place the TV on tall furniture, such as a
bookcase, without anchoring both the furniture and
TV to the wall or a suitable support.
• Teach children about the dangers of climbing on
furniture to reach the TV.
Risk of swallowing batteries !
The remote control may contain coin-type batteries
which can easily be swallowed by small children.
Keep these batteries out of reach of children at all
times.
Risk of Overheating
Never install the TV in a confined space. Always leave
a space of at least 10 cm or 4 inches around the TV
for ventilation. Ensure curtains or other objects never
cover the ventilation slots on the TV.
Lightning Storms
Disconnect the TV from the power outlet and antenna
before lightning storms.
During lightning storms, never touch any part of the
TV, power cord or antenna cable.
Risk of Hearing Damage
Avoid using earphones or headphones at high
volumes or for prolonged periods of time.
119
Low Temperatures
If the TV is transported in temperatures below 5°C or
41°F, unpack the TV and wait until the TV temperature
reaches room temperature before connecting the TV
to the power outlet.
Humidity
In rare occasions, depending on temperature and
humidity, minor condensation can occur on the inside
of the TV glass front (on some models). To prevent
this, do not expose the TV to direct sunlight, heat or
extreme humidity. If condensation occurs, it will
disappear spontaneously while the TV is playing for a
few hours.
The condensation moisture will not harm the TV or
cause malfunction.
27.2
Cleaning
• Never touch, push, rub or strike the screen with any
object.
• Unplug the TV before cleaning.
• Clean the TV and frame with a soft damp cloth and
wipe gently. Avoid touching the Ambilight LEDs on
the backside of the TV. Never use substances such as
alcohol, chemicals or household cleaners on the TV.
• To avoid deformations and colour fading, wipe off
water drops as quickly as possible.
• Avoid stationary images as much as possible.
Stationary images are images that remain onscreen
for extended periods of time. Stationary images
include onscreen menus, black bars, time displays,
etc. If you must use stationary images, reduce screen
contrast and brightness to avoid screen damage.
Ambilight Projection
You can clean a dusty lens with a cotton bud or a
blower brush. Avoid touching the lens with your
finger. Never touch, push, rub or strike the lens with
any hard or sharp object.
120
28
Terms of Use
28.1
Terms of Use - TV
2015 © TP Vision Europe B.V. All rights reserved.
This product was brought to the market by TP Vision
Europe B.V. or one of its affiliates, hereinafter referred
to as TP Vision, which is the manufacturer of the
product. TP Vision is the warrantor in relation to the
TV with which this booklet was packaged. Philips and
the Philips Shield Emblem are registered trademarks
of Koninklijke Philips N.V.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Trademarks are the property of Koninklijke Philips N.V
or their respective owners. TP Vision reserves the right
to change products at any time without being obliged
to adjust earlier supplies accordingly.
The written material packaged with the TV and the
manual stored in the memory of the TV or
downloaded from the Philips website
www.philips.com/support are believed to be
adequate for the intended use of the system.
The material in this manual is believed adequate for
the intended use of the system. If the product, or its
individual modules or procedures, are used for
purposes other than those specified herein,
confirmation of their validity and suitability must be
obtained. TP Vision warrants that the material itself
does not infringe any United States patents. No
further warranty is expressed or implied. TP Vision
cannot be held responsible neither for any errors in
the content of this document nor for any problems as
a result of the content in this document. Errors
reported to Philips will be adapted and published on
the Philips support website as soon as possible.
Terms of warranty - Risk of injury, damage to TV or
void of warranty!
Never attempt to repair the TV yourself. Use the TV
and accessories only as intended by the
manufacturer. The caution sign printed on the back of
the TV indicates risk of electric shock. Never remove
the TV cover. Always contact Philips TV Customer
Care for service or repairs. Find the telephone number
in the printed documentation that came with the
TV. Or consult our
website www.philips.com/support and select your
country if needed. Any operation expressly prohibited
in this manual, or any adjustments and assembly
procedures not recommended or authorised in this
manual, shall void the warranty.
Pixel characteristics
This LCD/LED product has a high number of colour
pixels. Although it has effective pixels of 99.999% or
more, black dots or bright points of light (red, green or
blue) may appear constantly on the screen. This is a
structural property of the display (within common
industry standards) and is not a malfunction.
CE compliance
This product is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directives 2006/95/EC (Low Voltage), 2004/108/EC
(EMC) and 2011/65/EU (ROHS).
Compliance with EMF
TP Vision manufactures and sells many products
targeted at consumers which, like any electronic
apparatus, in general have the ability to emit and
receive electromagnetic signals. One of TP Vision’s
leading business principles is to take all necessary
health and safety measures for our products, to
comply with all applicable legal requirements and to
stay well within the Electro Magnetic Field (EMF)
standards applicable at the time of producing the
products.
TP Vision is committed to developing, producing and
marketing products that cause no adverse health
effects. TP Vision confirms that, as long as its products
are handled properly for their intended use, they are
safe to use according to scientific evidence available
today. TP Vision plays an active role in the
development of international EMF and safety
standards, enabling TP Vision to anticipate further
developments in standardisation for early integration
in its products.
28.2
Terms of Use - Philips App
Gallery
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Terms of Use, App Gallery for more information.
121
29
Copyrights
29.1
HDMI
HDMI
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC in the United States and other
countries.
29.2
MHL
MHL®
MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link and the MHL Logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the MHL,
LLC.
29.3
Dolby
Dolby®
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
29.4
DTS Premium Sound
DTS Premium Sound ™
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com.
Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing
Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol
together are registered trademarks, and DTS 2.0
Channel is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
29.5
Wi-Fi Alliance
Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, the Wi-Fi logo are
registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
29.6
Microsoft
Windows Media
Windows Media is either a registered trademark or
trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
Microsoft PlayReady
Content owners use Microsoft PlayReady™ content
access technology to protect their intellectual
property, including copyrighted content.
This device uses PlayReady technology to access
PlayReady-protected content and/or WMDRM-
protected content. If the device fails to properly
enforce restrictions on content usage, content owners
may require Microsoft to revoke the device's ability to
122
consume PlayReady-protected content. Revocation
should not affect unprotected content or content
protected by other content access technologies.
Content owners may require you to upgrade
PlayReady to access their content. If you decline an
upgrade, you will not be able to access content that
requires the upgrade.
29.7
Other Trademarks
All other registered and unregistered trademarks are
the property of their respective owners.
123
Index
A
Account, Google 10
Add a Satellite 85
Airplay 59
Ambilight 60
Ambilight Projection 60
Ambilight Style 60
Ambilight Style, Shop 60
Ambilight+hue 71
Ambilight+hue, configuration 71
Ambilight+hue, Immersion 72
Ambilight+hue, on or off 72
Ambilight, advanced settings 73
Ambilight, Brightness 70
Ambilight, Follow audio 60
Ambilight, Follow colour 60
Ambilight, Follow video 60
Ambilight, Halo Size 70
Ambilight, ISF Tuning 73
Ambilight, Lounge Light 72
Ambilight, Saturation 71
Ambilight, settings 70
Ambilight, switch off 60
Ambilight, TV Switch Off 73
Ambilight, Wall Colour 73
AmbiLux 4
Android Operating System 112
Android Settings 79
Android TV, Sign in 10
App Gallery, Privacy Settings 11
App Gallery, Terms of Use 11
App, Start and stop 51
Apps 50
Apps, 18+ lock 52
Apps, Lock apps 52
Apps, manage apps 53
Audio Language 33
Audio Out Delay 17
Audio Out Format 17
Audio Out Levelling 17
Audio Out Offset 17
Audio Out Settings 17
Audio to Video Sync 17
Auto End Margin 40
Auto Volume Levelling 69
Automatic switch off 25
B
Bass 69
Bluetooth 19
Bluetooth, devices 19
Bluetooth, on or off 79
Bluetooth, pairing 19
Bluetooth, remove device 19
Bluetooth, select device 19
Brightness 66
Brightness, Philips logo 24
Browse the Internet 55
C
CAM, connect 14
CAM, passwords and PIN 15
CAM, view info 33
Camcorder, connect 23
Catch Up TV 43
Channel Installation, analogue 83
Channel Installation, Antenna/Cable 80
Channel Installation, Satellite 83
Channel List Copy 81
Channel List, filter 31
Channel List, logos 74
Channel Lists 31
Channel Logos 74
Channel Packages 83
Channel, favourites 34
Channel, lock 32
Channel, recommendations 43
Channels 31
Channels, watching 32
Child Lock 78
Child Lock, set PIN code 78
CI+ 15
Clear Internet Memory 10
Clear LCD 67
Clear Sound 70
Clock Settings 76
Cloud Explorer 56
Colour Enhancement 65
Colour Temperature 65
Computer, connect 23
Computer, open files 56
Computer, play your music 57
Computer, play your videos 56
Computer, view your photos 57
Connect, wired network 9
Connect, wireless network 8
Connected Device, name or type 48
Connectivity 113
Connectivity Guide 12
Contrast Mode 65
Copyrights 122
D
Date and Time 76
Demo Me 74
Demo Video Clip 74
Digital Text 35
Dimensions and Weights 113
Dropbox 56
DVB-T and DVB-C, settings 82
Dynamic Contrast 66
E
Easy Picture Setting 63
EasyLink HDMI CEC 13
EasyLink Remote Control, On/Off 14
EasyLink, On/Off 13
Eco Settings 73
Eco Settings, Energy Saving 73
End of Use 112
Energy Saving 73
Enter Text 28
European Energy Label 112
External Storage 21
124
F
Factory Settings 75
Favourite Channels 34
File Hosting Services 56
Forgot the PIN Code? 78
Frequent Settings 63
G
Game Console, connect 20
Game or Computer 48
Gamepad, connect 20
Gaming 54
Gamma 66
General Settings 74
Google Account 10
Google Cast 59
Google Play Apps 50
Google Play Store 51
Google, Sign in 10
Guide 38
H
HbbTV 36
HbbTV on This Channel 34
HbbTV, on or off 34
HDMI MHL 59
HDMI ports 12
HDMI, ARC 12
HDMI, CEC 13
HDMI, MHL 12
HDMI, Ultra HD 13
Headphone Volume 69
Headphones 19
Help 115
Home Menu 45
Home or Shop Location 74
Hue Bridge 71
Hue Bulbs 71
I
Input Name 48
Input Resolution 113
Internet, browse 55
Internet, cookies, bookmarks and history 10
ISF Colour Control 65
K
Keys on the Remote Control 26
Keys on TV 24
L
Light Sensor 66
Lock a Channel 32
Lock Apps 52
Locking Apps 52
M
Mains Power 112
Media 56
Media Server Software 113
Media, play your music 57
Media, play your videos 56
Media, view your photos 57
Menu Language 75
MHEG 36
MHL connection 59
Mono / Stereo 34
MPEG Artefact Reduction 67
Multi View 62
N
Natural Motion 67
Netflix 47
Network, clear memory 10
Network, settings 9
Network, switch on with Wi-Fi (WoWLAN) 9
Network, TV name 10
Network, Wi-Fi Smart Screen 10
Noise Reduction 66
Now on TV 43
O
One or Two Tuners (Satellite) 83
Online TV 43
Open Source License 89
Open Source Software 88
P
Pairing the Remote Control 29
Parental Rating 78
Pauze TV 41
Perfect Natural Motion 67
Philips App Gallery, install apps 51
Philips App Gallery, register 11
Philips Logo Brightness 24
Philips TV Remote App 59
Photo Camera, connect 22
Photos, Slideshow with music 57
Picture Format 63
Picture Settings 64
Picture Style 63
Picture, advanced settings 64
Picture, Brightness 66
Picture, Clear LCD 67
Picture, Colour Enhancement 65
Picture, Colour Temperature 65
Picture, Contrast Mode 65
Picture, Dynamic Contrast 66
Picture, Gamma 66
Picture, ISF Colour Control 65
Picture, Light Sensor 66
Picture, MPEG Artefact Reduction 67
Picture, Natural Motion 67
Picture, Noise Reduction 66
Picture, Perfect Natural Motion 67
Picture, Ultra Resolution 66
Picture, Video Contrast 66
PIN Code 78
PIP 62
Ports 12
Power Consumption 112
Q
Quick Picture Setting 63
R
Recording 40
Recording, conflicts 40
Recording, expired 40
Recording, schedule manualy 41
Recording, watch a recording 41
Red Button 36
Reinstall TV 75
Remote Control, batteries 30
Remote Control, keyboard 28
Remote Control, overview 26
125
Remote Control, pairing 29
Remote Control, qwerty and azerty 28
Remote Control, qwerty and cyrillic 28
Remote Control, touch pad 27
Remote Control, voice 27
Rental Videos 44
Repair 118
Replay 41
Reset the PIN Code 78
Restricted Profile 52
Return to Factory Settings 75
S
Safety Instructions 119
Satellite Installation, problems 86
Satellite, 1 or 2 tuners 6
Satellite, add a satellite 85
Search with Voice 27
Settings 63
Settings, ecological 73
Settings, frequent 63
Settings, general 74
Settings, picture 63
Settings, shop location 74
Settings, sound 67
Shop Settings 74
Sign In to Google 10
Sleep Timer 24
Slideshow with music 57
Smartphones and Tablets 59
Software 88
Software, update 88
Software, version 88
Sound Settings 69
Sound Style 67
Sound, advanced settings 69
Sound, Audio Out Delay 17
Sound, Audio Out Format 17
Sound, Audio Out Levelling 17
Sound, Audio Out Offset 17
Sound, Auto Volume Levelling 69
Sound, Bass 69
Sound, Clear Sound 70
Sound, Headphone Volume 69
Sound, speakers 69
Sound, Surround Mode 69
Sound, Treble 69
Sound, TV Placement 70
Source Name 48
Sources 48
Speakers, select speaker 68
Specification, display type 113
Specification, input resolution 113
Specification, multimedia 113
Specification, reception 112
Specification, sound 113
Specifications 112
Subtitle, language 33
Subtitles 33
Subwoofer volume 68
Support 115
Surround Mode 69
Switch Off Timer 25
Switching On and Off 24
T
Teletext 35
Terms of Use, App Gallery 11
Terms of Use, TV 121
Text 35
Text, entering 28
Time and Date 76
Time Zone 76
Timer 24
Top Picks 42
Trademarks 122
Treble 69
Troubleshooting 115
TV Apps 50
TV Connections 12
TV Guide 38
TV Guide, broadcaster or Internet 38
TV Input 48
TV Menu 46
TV name 10
TV on Demand 43
TV Placement 70
TV Switch Off 73
Two CAMs 14
U
Ultra Resolution 66
Unicable, connect 7
Unicable, setup 84
Universal Access 77
Universal Access, Audio Description 77
Universal Access, hearing impaired 77
Universal Access, switch on 77
Update Channels, Antenna/Cable 80
Update Channels, Satellite 85
Update Software 88
USB device, open files 56
USB device, play your music 57
USB device, play your videos 56
USB device, view your photos 57
USB Flash Drive 22
USB Hard Drive, connect 21
USB Hard Drive, formatting 21
USB Hard Drive, installation 21
USB Keyboard 21
User Band Frequency 84
User Band Number 84
V
Video Contrast 66
Video on Demand 44
Video Stores 44
Videos, Photos and Music 56
Voice 27
W
Wall Colour 73
Wi-Fi Smart Screen 10
Wi-Fi, On or Off 8
Wired Network Connection 9
Wireless Network Connection 8
Wireless Speakers 19
Wireless Speakers 68
WPS 8
Wrong menu language 75
Y
Your Media 56
126
